Technology, Engineering & Agriculture Books
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Recommendations of the Committee for Waterfront
Book SynopsisThe recommendations have been completely restructured in this 12th (2020) edition of the EAU (10th English edition), the aim being to provide readers with a better, clearer arrangement of the chapters. In addition, the information published in the annual technical reports of the Waterfront Structures Committee since the publication of the 11th German edition have been incorporated in this new edition. The recommendations also take into account the new generation of standards consisting of Eurocode 7, the associated National Application Documents and supplementary national publications (DIN 1054:2010). In isolated instances, partial safety factors differing from those in the codes are specified on the basis of practical experience. Safety standards for ports, harbours and marine structures are therefore upheld. The recommendations satisfy the need for international acceptance in the planning, design, tendering, award of contract, construction, site supervision, acceptance and settlement of accounts for port, harbour and waterway facilities based on uniform approaches.Table of ContentsPreface xv 1 Safety and verification concept 1 1.1 Principles of the safety and verification concept for waterfront structures 1 1.1.1 General 1 1.1.2 Normative regulations for waterfront structures 1 1.1.3 Geotechnical categories 3 1.1.4 Design situations 3 1.2 Verification for waterfront structures 4 1.2.1 Principles for verification 4 1.2.2 Design approaches 4 1.2.3 Analysis of the serviceability limit state 5 1.2.4 Analysis of the ultimate limit state 6 References 10 2 Ship dimensions 11 2.1 Sea-going ships 11 2.1.1 Passenger ships and cruise liners 12 2.1.2 Bulk carriers 12 2.1.3 General cargo ships 12 2.1.4 Container ships 13 2.1.5 Ferries 13 2.1.6 RoRo/ConRo vessels 13 2.1.7 Oil tankers 14 2.1.8 Gas tankers 15 2.2 Inland waterway vessels 15 2.3 Offshore installation vessels 19 3 Geotechnical principles 21 3.1 Geotechnical report 21 3.2 Subsoil 21 3.2.1 Mean characteristic values of soil parameters 21 3.2.2 Layout and depths of boreholes and penetrometer tests 27 3.2.3 Determining the shear strength cu of saturated, undrained cohesive soils 28 3.2.4 Assessing the subsoil for the installation of piles and sheet piles and for selecting the installation method 31 3.2.5 Classifying the subsoil in homogeneous zones 34 3.3 Water pressure 35 3.3.1 General 35 3.3.2 Resultant water pressure in the direction of the water side 36 3.3.3 Resultant water pressure on quay walls in front of embankments with elevated platforms in tidal areas 38 3.3.4 Taking account of groundwater flow 39 3.4 Hydraulic heave failure 45 3.5 Earth pressure 49 3.5.1 General 49 3.5.2 Considering the cohesion in cohesive soils 49 3.5.3 Considering the apparent cohesion (capillary cohesion) in sand 49 3.5.4 Determining active earth pressure for a steep, paved embankment in a partially sloping waterfront structure 49 3.5.5 Determining the active earth pressure shielding on a wall below a relieving platform with average ground surcharges 50 3.5.6 Earth pressure distribution under limited loads 52 3.5.7 Determining active earth pressure in saturated, non-consolidated or partially consolidated, soft cohesive soils 53 3.5.8 Effect of water pressure difference beneath beds of watercourses 56 3.5.9 Considering active earth pressure and resultant water pressure, and construction guidance for waterfront structures with soil replacement and a contaminated or disturbed base of excavation 57 3.5.10 Effect of groundwater flow on resultant water pressure and active and passive earth pressures 60 3.5.11 Determining the amount of displacement required to mobilise passive earth pressure in non-cohesive soils 62 3.5.12 Measures for increasing the passive earth pressure in front of waterfront structures 63 3.5.13 Passive earth pressure in front of abrupt changes in ground level in soft cohesive soils with rapid load application on the land side 65 3.5.14 Waterfront structures in seismic regions 65 References 69 4 Loads on waterfront structures 73 4.1 Vessel berthing velocities and pressures 73 4.1.1 Guide values 73 4.1.2 Loads on waterfront structures due to fender reaction forces 74 4.2 Vertical imposed loads 74 4.2.1 General 74 4.2.2 Basic situation 1 76 4.2.3 Basic situation 2 76 4.2.4 Basic situation 3 76 4.2.5 Loading assumptions for quay surfaces 76 4.3 Sea state and wave pressure 77 4.3.1 General 77 4.3.2 Description of the sea state 77 4.3.3 Determining the sea state parameters 78 4.3.4 Design concepts and specification of design parameters 82 4.3.5 Conversion of the sea state 83 4.3.6 Wave pressure on vertical quay walls in coastal areas 85 4.4 Effects of waves due to ship movements 90 4.4.1 General 90 4.4.2 Wave heights 91 4.5 Choosing a greater design depth (allowance for scouring) 94 4.6 Loads arising from surging and receding waves due to the inflow or outflow of water 94 4.6.1 General 94 4.6.2 Determining wave values 94 4.6.3 Loading assumptions 95 4.7 Wave pressure on piled structures 96 4.7.1 General 96 4.7.2 Method of calculation according to Morison et al. (1950) 98 4.7.3 Determining the wave loads on a single vertical pile 98 4.7.4 coefficients c d and c m 100 4.7.5 Forces from breaking waves 100 4.7.6 Wave load on a group of piles 101 4.7.7 Raking piles 101 4.7.8 Safety factors 102 4.7.9 Vertical wave load (“wave slamming”) 103 4.8 Moored ships and their influence on the design of mooring equipment and fenders 106 4.8.1 General 106 4.8.2 Critical wind speed 108 4.8.3 Wind loads on moored vessels 108 4.8.4 Loads on mooring equipment and fenders 110 4.9 Loads on bollards 110 4.9.1 Loads on bollards for sea-going vessels 110 4.9.2 Loads on bollards for inland waterway vessels 112 4.9.3 Direction of line pull load 113 4.9.4 Design for line pull loads 113 4.10 Quay loads from cranes and other transhipment equipment 113 4.10.1 Conventional general cargo cranes 113 4.10.2 Container cranes 113 4.10.3 Load specifications for port cranes 115 4.10.4 Notes 116 4.11 Impact and pressure of ice on waterfront structures, fenders and dolphins in coastal areas 116 4.11.1 General 116 4.11.2 Determining the compressive strength of ice 117 4.11.3 Ice loads on waterfront structures and other structures of greater extent 118 4.11.4 Ice loads on vertical piles 121 4.11.5 Horizontal ice load on a group of piles 121 4.11.6 Ice surcharges 122 4.11.7 Vertical loads with rising or falling water levels 122 4.12 Impact and pressure of ice on waterfront structures, piers and dolphins at inland facilities 123 4.12.1 General 123 4.12.2 Ice thickness 123 4.12.3 Compressive strength of the ice 124 4.12.4 Ice loads on waterfront structures and other structures of greater extent 124 4.12.5 Ice loads on narrow structures (piles, dolphins, bridge and weir piers and ice deflectors) 125 4.12.6 Ice loads on groups of structures 125 4.12.7 Vertical loads with rising or falling water levels 126 References 126 5 Earthworks and dredging 131 5.1 Dredging in front of quay walls in seaports 131 5.2 Dredging and hydraulic fill tolerances 132 5.2.1 General 132 5.2.2 Dredging tolerances 133 5.3 Hydraulic filling of port areas for planned waterfront structures 135 5.3.1 General 135 5.3.2 Hydraulic filling of port above the water table 136 5.3.3 Hydraulic filling of port areas below the water table 137 5.4 Backfilling of waterfront structures 139 5.4.1 General 139 5.4.2 Backfilling in the dry 140 5.4.3 Backfilling underwater 140 5.4.4 Additional remarks 141 5.5 In situ density of hydraulically filled non-cohesive soils 141 5.5.1 General 141 5.5.2 Empirical values for in situ density 141 5.5.3 In situ density required for port areas 142 5.5.4 Checking the in situ density 142 5.6 In situ density of dumped non-cohesive soils 142 5.6.1 General 142 5.6.2 Influences on the achievable in situ density 143 5.7 Dredging underwater slopes 144 5.7.1 General 144 5.7.2 Dredging underwater slopes in loose sand 144 5.7.3 Dredging equipment 144 5.7.4 Execution of dredging work 145 5.8 Subsidence of non-cohesive soils 146 5.9 Soil replacement along a line of piles for a waterfront structure 147 5.9.1 General 147 5.9.2 Dredging 148 5.9.3 Cleaning the base of the excavation before filling it with sand 149 5.9.4 Placing the sand fill 150 5.9.5 Checking the sand fill 150 5.10 Dynamic compaction of the soil 151 5.11 Vertical drains to accelerate the consolidation of soft cohesive soils 151 5.11.1 General 151 5.11.2 Applications 152 5.11.3 Design 152 5.11.4 Design of plastic drains 153 5.11.5 Installation 154 5.12 Consolidation of soft cohesive soils by preloading 154 5.12.1 General 154 5.12.2 Applications 154 5.12.3 Bearing capacity of in situ soil 155 5.12.4 Fill material 156 5.12.5 Determining the depth of preload fill 156 5.12.6 Minimum extent of preload fill 158 5.12.7 Soil improvement through vacuum consolidation with vertical drains 158 5.12.8 Execution of soil improvement through vacuum consolidation with vertical drains 159 5.12.9 Checking the consolidation 159 5.12.10 Secondary settlement 159 5.13 Improving the bearing capacity of soft cohesive soils with vertical elements 160 5.13.1 General 160 5.13.2 Methods 160 5.13.3 Construction of pile-type load-bearing elements 162 References 163 6 Protection and stabilisation structures 165 6.1 Bank and bottom protection 165 6.1.1 Embankment stabilisation on inland waterways 165 6.1.2 Slopes in seaports and tidal inland ports 170 6.1.3 Use of geotextile filters in bank and bottom protection 174 6.1.4 Scour and protection against scour in front of waterfront structures 176 6.1.5 Scour protection at piers and dolphins 185 6.1.6 Installation of mineral impervious linings underwater and their connection to waterfront structures 185 6.2 Flood defence walls in seaports 187 6.2.1 General 187 6.2.2 Critical water levels 187 6.2.3 Excess water pressure and unit weight of soil 188 6.2.4 Minimum embedment depths for flood defence walls 189 6.2.5 Special loads on flood defence walls 189 6.2.6 Guidance on designing flood defence walls in slopes 190 6.2.7 Structural measures 190 6.2.8 Buried utilities in the region of flood defence walls 191 6.3 Rouble mound moles and breakwaters 191 6.3.1 General 191 6.3.2 Stability analyses, settlement and subsidence and guidance on construction 192 6.3.3 Specifying the geometry of the structure 192 6.3.4 Designing the armour layer 194 6.3.5 Construction of breakwaters 198 6.3.6 Construction and use of equipment 198 6.3.7 Settlement and subsidence 201 6.3.8 Invoicing for installed quantities 201 References 201 7 Configuration of cross-sections and equipment for waterfront structures 205 7.1 Configuration of cross-sections 205 7.1.1 Standard cross-sectional dimensions for waterfront structures in seaports 205 7.1.2 Top edges of waterfront structures in seaports 207 7.1.3 Standard cross-sections for waterfront structures in inland ports 208 7.1.4 Upgrading partially sloped waterfronts in inland ports with large water level fluctuations 212 7.1.5 Design of waterfront areas in inland ports according to operational aspects 214 7.1.6 Nominal depth and design depth of the harbour bottom 215 7.1.7 Strengthening waterfront structures for deepening harbour bottoms in seaports 217 7.1.8 Embankments below waterfront wall superstructures behind closed sheet pile walls 221 7.1.9 Re-design of waterfront structures in inland ports 221 7.1.10 Waterfront structures in regions with mining subsidence 224 7.2 Equipment 227 7.2.1 Provision of quick-release hooks at berths for large vessels 227 7.2.2 Layout and design of and loads on access ladders 227 7.2.3 Layout and design of stairs in seaports 230 7.2.4 Armoured steel sheet pile walls 231 7.2.5 Equipment for waterfront structures in seaports with supply and disposal systems 235 7.2.6 Layout of bollards 241 7.2.7 Foundations to craneways on waterfront structures 243 7.2.8 Fixing crane rails to concrete 245 7.2.9 Connection of expansion joints seal in reinforced concrete bottoms to load-bearing steel sheet pile walls 251 7.2.10 Connection of steel sheet piles to a concrete structure 252 7.2.11 Steel capping beams for sheet pile waterfront structures 254 7.2.12 Reinforced concrete capping beams for waterfront structures with steel sheet piles 257 7.2.13 Steel nosings to protect reinforced concrete walls and capping beams on waterfront structures 261 7.2.14 Floating berths in seaports 263 7.3 Drainage 265 7.3.1 Design of weepholes for sheet pile structures 265 7.3.2 Design of drainage systems for waterfront structures in tidal areas 266 7.4 Fenders 268 7.4.1 Fenders for large vessels 268 7.4.2 Fenders in inland ports 283 7.5 Offshore energy support bases 284 7.5.1 General 284 7.5.2 Basis for design 284 7.5.3 Nautical requirements 285 7.5.4 Calculating the leg penetration of WTIVs 288 7.5.5 Maintaining and monitoring the jacking surfaces 291 7.5.6 Logistical requirements 292 7.6 RoRo berths 298 7.6.1 General 298 7.6.2 Loading assumptions for RoRo terminals 299 7.6.3 Kinematics 301 7.6.4 Classification of ship-to-shore facilities 303 7.6.5 Facilities and equipment on the land side 308 7.7 Jetties 312 7.7.1 Introduction 312 7.7.2 Design of jetties 313 7.7.3 Design of berthing and mooring facilities (ship-to-shore) 315 7.7.4 Structural elements of berths 317 7.7.5 Interaction between load-bearing structure and installations on deck 320 References 322 8 Sheet pile walls 325 8.1 Materials and construction 325 8.1.1 Materials for sheet pile walls 325 8.1.2 Steel sheet pile walls – properties and forms 326 8.1.3 Watertightness of steel sheet pile walls 340 8.1.4 Welding steel sheet pile walls 342 8.1.5 Installation of steel sheet pile walls 346 8.1.6 Driving assistance 366 8.1.7 Monitoring pile driving operations 371 8.1.8 Repairing interlock declutching on driven steel sheet piling 373 8.1.9 Noise control – low-noise driving 377 8.1.10 Corrosion of steel sheet piling, and countermeasures 381 8.1.11 Risk of sand grinding on sheet piling 387 8.2 Design of sheet pile walls 387 8.2.1 General 387 8.2.2 Free-standing/cantilever sheet pile walls 391 8.2.3 Design of sheet pile walls with fixity in the ground and a single row of anchors 392 8.2.4 Design of sheet pile walls with a double row of anchors 396 8.2.5 Applying the angle of earth pressure and the analysis in the vertical direction 397 8.2.6 Taking account of unfavourable groundwater flows in the passive earth pressure zone 407 8.2.7 Verifying the load-bearing capacity of a quay wall 407 8.2.8 Selection of embedment depth for sheet piles 410 8.2.9 Determining the embedment depth for sheet pile walls with full or partial fixity in the soil 410 8.2.10 Steel sheet pile walls with staggered embedment depths 413 8.2.11 Horizontal actions on steel sheet pile walls in the longitudinal direction of the quay 415 8.2.12 Design of anchor walls fixed in the ground 418 8.2.13 Staggered arrangement of anchor walls 419 8.2.14 Waterfront sheet pile walls in unconsolidated, soft cohesive soils, especially in connection with non-sway structures 419 8.2.15 Design of single-anchor sheet pile walls in seismic zones 420 8.2.16 Sheet pile waterfronts on inland waterways 421 8.2.17 Calculation and design of cofferdams 422 References 432 9 Anchorages 435 9.1 Piles and anchors 435 9.1.1 General 435 9.1.2 Displacement piles 435 9.1.3 Load-bearing capacity of displacement piles 437 9.1.4 Micropiles 438 9.1.5 Special piles 439 9.1.6 Anchors 439 9.2 Walings and pile and anchor connections 446 9.2.1 Design of steel walings for sheet piling 446 9.2.2 Verification of steel walings 447 9.2.3 Reinforced concrete walings to sheet pile walls with driven steel piles 448 9.2.4 Auxiliary anchors at the top of steel sheet piling structures 450 9.2.5 Sheet piling anchors in unconsolidated, soft cohesive soils 451 9.2.6 Design of protruding quay wall corners with round steel tie rods 454 9.2.7 Configuration and design of protruding quay wall corners with raking anchor piles 456 9.2.8 Prestressing of high-strength steel anchors for waterfront structures 458 9.2.9 Hinged connections between driven steel piles and steel sheet piling structures 460 9.3 Verification of stability for anchoring at the lower failure plane 469 9.3.1 Stability at the lower failure plane for anchorages with anchor walls 469 9.3.2 Stability at the lower failure plane in unconsolidated, saturated cohesive soils 471 9.3.3 Stability at the lower failure plane with varying soil strata 471 9.3.4 Verification of stability at the lower failure for a quay wall fixed in the soil 472 9.3.5 Stability at the lower failure plane for an anchor wall fixed in the soil 472 9.3.6 Stability at the lower failure plane for anchors with anchor plates 472 9.3.7 Verification of safety against failure of anchoring soil 472 9.3.8 Stability at the lower failure plane for quay walls anchored with piles or grouted anchors at one level 473 9.3.9 Stability at the lower failure plane for quay walls with anchors at more than one level 474 9.3.10 Safety against slope failure 475 References 476 10 Quay walls and superstructures in concrete 481 10.1 General 481 10.2 Construction materials 482 10.2.1 Concrete 482 10.2.2 Steel reinforcement 484 10.3 Design and construction 484 10.3.1 Construction joints 484 10.3.2 Expansion joints 485 10.3.3 Jointless construction 485 10.3.4 Crack width limitation 485 10.4 Forms of construction 486 10.4.1 Concrete walls 486 10.4.2 Retaining walls 488 10.4.3 Block-type construction 488 10.4.4 Box caissons 491 10.4.5 Open caissons 492 References 496 11 Pile bents and trestles 499 11.1 General 499 11.2 Configuration and design of a pile bent 499 11.2.1 General 499 11.2.2 Earth pressure loads 500 11.2.3 Load due to excess water pressure 501 11.2.4 Load path for piles 502 11.3 Design of pile trestles 503 11.3.1 Free-standing pile trestles 503 11.3.2 Special structures designed as pile trestles 505 11.3.3 Structural system and calculations 505 11.3.4 Construction guidance 506 11.4 Design of pile bents and trestles in earthquake zones 507 11.4.1 General 507 11.4.2 Active and passive earth pressures, excess water pressure, variable loads 507 11.4.3 Resisting the horizontal inertial forces of the superstructure 507 References 508 12 Dolphins 509 12.1 Design and construction 509 12.1.1 Dolphins – purposes and types 509 12.1.2 Layout of dolphins 509 12.1.3 Equipment for dolphins 510 12.1.4 Advice for selecting materials 511 12.2 Detailed design 512 12.2.1 Stiffness of the system 512 12.2.2 Structural behaviour 512 12.2.3 Actions 513 12.2.4 Safety concept 515 12.2.5 Soil—structure interaction and the resulting design variables 515 12.2.6 The required energy absorption capacity of breasting dolphins 520 12.2.7 Other calculations 521 References 522 13 Operation, maintenance and repair of waterfront structures 525 13.1 Operation of waterfront structures 525 13.1.1 General 525 13.1.2 Building information modelling (BIM) 525 13.2 Inspecting waterfront structures 526 13.2.1 Documentation 527 13.2.2 Structural inspections 528 13.2.3 Inspection intervals 529 13.2.4 Structural monitoring supported by measurements 530 13.3 Assessing the load-bearing capacity of an existing waterfront structure 531 13.4 Repairing concrete waterfront structures 533 13.5 Upgrading and deconstructing existing waterfront structures 533 13.5.1 Upgrading measures 533 13.5.2 Deconstruction in conjunction with replacement measures 535 References 535 Appendix A Notation 537 A. 1 Symbols for variables 538 A.. 1 Latin lower-case letters 538 A.1. 2 Latin upper-case letters 540 A.1. 3 Greek letters 542 A. 2 Subscripts and indices 543 A. 3 Abbreviations 544 A. 4 Water levels and wave heights 545 List of Advertisers 547
£999.99
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Applied Building Physics: Ambient Conditions,
Book SynopsisWhile the first volume on building physics deals with the physical principles of heat, air and moisture behaviour of buildings, building structures and components, this second volume on applied building physics focuses on the question of what the desired performance of buildings consists of. To achieve this, knowledge of the external environmental effects and the internal live loads to which buildings are subjected is a necessary first step. Subsequently, the performance requirements and the physical correspondences are deepened with the determination of their physical parameters, at the levels of buildings, building structures and building components. Compared to the second edition, the discussion of criteria is not limited to thermal comfort, but also includes acoustic, visual and olfactory aspects. Likewise, the indoor air quality is considered in a broader way. Analyses and calculations result in sustainable buildings with a comfortable indoor climate from functional and durable building constructions. Compared to the second edition, the text for the third edition has been reorganised, corrected, revised and expanded where appropriate. A useful appendix for quick reference contains standard values of material properties for a wide range of building materials. The analyses and calculations described in this book result in sustainable buildings made of functional and durable building constructions, with comfortable and healthy indoor climate and air quality. Compared to the second edition the text in this third edition has been reshuffled, corrected, reworked and extended where appropriate.Table of ContentsPreface Units and Symbols Introduction, Historical Review 1 Ambient Conditions Out- and Indoors 1.1 Overview 1.2 Outdoors 1.3 Indoors Further Reading 2 Performance Metrics and Arrays 2.1 Definitions 2.2 Functional Demands 2.3 Performance Requirements 2.4 A short history 2.5 Performance arrays Further Reading 3 Functional Demands at the Whole Building Level 3.1 In brief 3.2 Thermal, acoustical, visual and olfactory comfort 3.3 Health and Indoor environmental quality (IEQ) 3.4 Energy Efficiency 3.5 Durability 3.6 Economics 3.7 Sustainability 3.8 High performance buildings Further Reading 4 Heat, Air, Moisture Metrics at the Building Assembly Level 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Air-tightness 4.3 Thermal transmittance 4.4 Transient thermal response 4.5 Moisture tolerance 4.6 Thermal bridging 4.7 Contact coefficient 4.8 Hygrothermal stress and strain 4.9 Transparent parts: solar transmittance Further Reading 5 The Envelope Parts HAM Performances Applied to Timber-Frame 5.1 In general 5.2 Assembly 5.3 Performance evaluation Further Reading Appendix: Heat, Air, Moisture Material Properties Index
£76.50
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH PerformanceBased Building Design
Book SynopsisThis third book in a series of three dealing with building physics and its application, looks to the impact a performance requirements linked approach has on building design and construction. It starts with a resumption of what''s expected from buildings, followed by discussing a range of materials needed to guarantee a correct heat, air, moisture response. Then, looked is to preparing the building site, the excavations needed, the foundations, the below-grade parts and spaces, the structural systems commonly used, the floors, different types of outer walls, different types of roof assemblies, inside walls, the glazing, windows, outer doors, glass façades, balconies, all kind of shafts, chimneys, stairs, timber-frame construction, wall, floor and ceiling finishes. Each time again, not only the heat, air, moisture related metrics but also structural integrity, durability, fire safety, acoustics, maintenance, sustainability and buildability are discussed. The whole ends with looking to the risks deficiencies may cause. To do so, beside years of teaching, research and curing damage cases due to failing performance, a bunch of national and international sources and literature has been consulted, which is why each chapter ends with an extended has read list. Mayor changes compared to the first edition is that the two volumes form one now, whereby combining, reshuffling, extending and redrafting was done where appropriate and necessary, so reducing the number of chapters from 28 to 20. Excavations and foundations now form a joint chapter, while the requirements for outer walls and roofs are considered uniformly and are now available in eight chapters on the building envelope, five of which are on outer walls and three on roof structures. Then come the inside walls and other specific parts, followed by one chapter on windows, outer doors and glass facades. The last three chapters deal with timber-frame construction, finishings, and risk assessment. The content of all chapters has been critically reviewed, actualized and gifted with additional figures where needed, so incorporating the experiences gained during 38 years of teaching to architectural and building engineering students, 36 years of research and 53 years of consultancy. (Package: Print Book + ePDF)
£999.99
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Chemoinformatics: A Textbook
a huge range and FREE tracked UK delivery on ALL orders.
£67.45
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Semiconductor Electrochemistry
Book SynopsisProviding both an introduction and an up-to-date survey of the entire field, this text captivates the reader with its clear style and inspiring, yet solid presentation. The significantly expanded second edition of this milestone work is supplemented by a completely new chapter on the hot topic of nanoparticles and includes the latest insights into the deposition of dye layers on semiconductor electrodes. In his monograph, the acknowledged expert Professor Memming primarily addresses physical and electrochemists, but materials scientists, physicists, and engineers dealing with semiconductor technology and its applications will also benefit greatly from the contents.Table of ContentsPreface to the Second Edition XI Preface XIII 1 Principles of Semiconductor Physics 1 1.1 Crystal Structure 1 1.2 Energy Levels in Solids 3 1.3 Optical Properties 8 1.4 Density of States and Carrier Concentrations 11 1.4.1 Intrinsic Semiconductors 14 1.4.2 Doped Semiconductors 15 1.5 Carrier Transport Phenomena 17 1.6 Excitation and Recombination of Charge Carriers 19 1.7 Fermi Levels under Nonequilibrium Conditions 21 2 Semiconductor Surfaces and Solid–Solid Junctions 23 2.1 Metal and Semiconductor Surfaces in a Vacuum 23 2.2 Metal–Semiconductor Contacts (Schottky Junctions) 26 2.2.1 Barrier Heights 26 2.2.2 Majority Carrier Transfer Processes 31 2.2.3 Minority Carrier Transfer Processes 35 2.3 p–n Junctions 38 2.4 Ohmic Contacts 41 2.5 Photovoltages and Photocurrents 42 2.6 Surface Recombination 46 3 Electrochemical Systems 49 3.1 Electrolytes 49 3.1.1 Ion Transport in Solutions 49 3.1.2 Interaction between Ions and Solvent 52 3.2 Potentials and Thermodynamics of Electrochemical Cells 53 3.2.1 Chemical and Electrochemical Potentials 53 3.2.2 Cell Voltages 56 3.2.3 Reference Potentials 59 3.2.4 Standard Potential and Fermi Level of Redox Systems 60 4 Experimental Techniques 65 4.1 Electrode Preparation 65 4.2 Current–Voltage Measurements 65 4.2.1 Voltametry 65 4.2.2 PhotocurrentMeasurements 67 4.2.3 Rotating Ring Disk Electrodes 68 4.2.4 Scanning ElectrochemicalMicroscopy (SECM) 69 4.3 Measurements of Surface Recombination and Minority Carrier Injection 70 4.4 Impedance Measurements 72 4.4.1 Basic Rules and Techniques 72 4.4.2 Evaluation of Impedance Spectra 74 4.4.3 Intensity Modulated Photocurrent Spectroscopy (IMPS) 78 4.5 Surface Conductivity Measurement 80 4.6 Flash Photolysis Investigations 82 4.7 Surface Science Techniques 82 4.7.1 Spectroscopic Methods 83 4.7.2 In situ SurfaceMicroscopy (STMand AFM) 85 5 Solid–Liquid Interface 89 5.1 Structure of the Interface and Adsorption 89 5.2 Charge and Potential Distribution at the Interface 91 5.2.1 The Helmholtz Double Layer 92 5.2.2 Gouy Layer in the Electrolyte 93 5.2.3 Space Charge Layer in the Semiconductor 94 5.2.4 Charge Distribution in Surface States 101 5.3 Analysis of the Potential Distribution 102 5.3.1 Germanium Electrodes 102 5.3.2 Silicon Electrodes 109 5.3.3 Compound Semiconductor Electrodes 111 5.3.4 Flatband Potential and Position of Energy Bands at the Interface 114 5.3.5 Unpinning of Energy Bands during Illumination 118 5.4 Modification of Semiconductor Surfaces 123 6 Electron Transfer Theories 127 6.1 The Theory of Marcus 127 6.1.1 Electron Transfer in Homogeneous Solutions 127 6.1.2 The Reorganization Energy 132 6.1.3 Adiabatic and Nonadiabatic Reactions 134 6.1.4 Electron Transfer Processes at Electrodes 134 6.2 The Gerischer Model 138 6.2.1 Energy States in Solution 138 6.2.2 Electron Transfer 143 6.3 Quantum Mechanical Treatments of Electron Transfer Processes 145 6.3.1 Introductory Comments 146 6.3.2 Nonadiabatic Reactions 149 6.3.3 Adiabatic Reactions 156 6.4 The Problemof Deriving Rate Constants 165 6.5 Comparison of Theories 167 7 Charge Transfer Processes at the Semiconductor–Liquid Interface 169 7.1 Charge Transfer Processes at Metal Electrodes 169 7.1.1 Kinetics of Electron Transfer at the Metal–Liquid Interface 169 7.1.2 Diffusion-controlled Processes 178 7.1.3 Investigations of Redox Reactions by Linear Sweep Voltametry 182 7.1.4 Criteria for Reversible and Irreversible Reactions 183 7.2 Qualitative Description of Current–Potential Curves at Semiconductor Electrodes 185 7.3 One-step Redox Reactions 186 7.3.1 The Energetics of Charge Transfer Processes 186 7.3.2 Quantitative Derivation of Current–Potential Curves 189 7.3.3 Light-Induced Processes 194 7.3.4 Majority Carrier Reactions 198 7.3.5 Minority Carrier Reactions 211 7.3.6 Electron Transfer in the “Inverted Region” 222 7.4 The Quasi-Fermi-Level Concept 225 7.4.1 Basic Model 225 7.4.2 Application of the Concept to Photocurrents 229 7.4.3 Consequences for the Relation between Impedance and IMPS Spectra 233 7.4.4 Quasi-Fermi-Level Positions under High-Level Injections 237 7.5 Determination of the Reorganization Energy 240 7.6 Two-step Redox Processes 244 7.7 Photoluminescence and Electroluminescence 249 7.7.1 Kinetic Studies by Photoluminescence Measurement 250 7.7.2 Electroluminescence Induced by Minority Carrier Injection 255 7.8 Hot Carrier Processes 258 7.9 Catalysis of Electrode Reactions 262 8 Electrochemical Decomposition of Semiconductors 267 8.1 Anodic Dissolution Reactions 267 8.1.1 Germanium 267 8.1.2 Silicon 271 8.1.3 Compound Semiconductors 279 8.2 Cathodic Decomposition 283 8.3 Dissolution under Open Circuit Conditions 283 8.4 Energetics and Thermodynamics of Corrosion 285 8.5 Competition between Redox Reaction and Anodic Dissolution 288 8.6 Formation of Porous Semiconductor Surfaces 293 9 Photoreactions at Semiconductor Particles 295 9.1 Quantum Size Effects 295 9.1.1 Quantum Dots 296 9.1.2 Single Crystalline Quantum Films and Superlattices 303 9.1.3 Size Quantized Nanocrystalline Films 305 9.2 Charge Transfer Processes at Semiconductor Particles 306 9.2.1 Reactions in Suspensions and Colloidal Solutions 306 9.2.2 Photoelectron Emission 313 9.2.3 Comparison between Reactions at Semiconductor Particles and at Compact Electrodes 316 9.2.4 The Role of Surface Chemistry 317 9.2.5 Enhanced Redox Chemistry in Quantized Colloids 318 9.2.6 Reaction Routes at Small and Big Particles 322 9.2.7 Sandwich Formation between Different Particles and between Particle and Electrode 324 9.3 Charge Transfer Processes at Quantum Well Electrodes (MQW,SQW) 327 9.4 Photoelectrochemical Reactions at Nanocrystalline Semiconductor Layers 331 9.4.1 Impact Ionization and Carrier Multiplication 333 9.4.2 Hot Carrier Cooling and ExcitonMultiplication in Quantum Dots 335 9.4.3 Multiple Exciton Collection in a Sensitized Photovoltaic System 340 10 Electron Transfer Processes between ExcitedMolecules and Semiconductor Electrodes 343 10.1 Energy Levels of Excited Molecules 343 10.2 Reactions at Semiconductor Electrodes 349 10.2.1 Spectra of Sensitized Photocurrents 349 10.2.2 Dye Molecules Adsorbed on the Electrode and in Solution 352 10.2.3 Potential Dependence of Sensitization Currents 356 10.2.4 Sensitization Processes at Semiconductor Surfaces Modified by Dye Monolayers 357 10.2.5 Quantum Efficiencies, Regeneration, and Supersensitization 364 10.2.6 Kinetics of Electron Transfer between Dye and Semiconductor Electrode 366 10.2.7 Sensitization Processes at Nanocrystalline Semiconductor Electrodes 370 10.3 Comparison with Reactions at Metal Electrodes 375 10.4 Production of Excited Molecules by Electron Transfer 376 11 Applications 379 11.1 Photoelectrochemical Solar Energy Conversion 379 11.1.1 Electrochemical Photovoltaic Cells 379 11.1.2 Photoelectrolysis 402 11.1.3 Photoreduction of CO2 424 11.2 Photocatalytic Processes 426 11.2.1 Photodegradation of Pollutants 427 11.2.2 Photocatalytic Reactions 429 11.2.3 Light-Induced Chemical Reactions 430 11.3 Etching of Semiconductors 431 11.4 Light-Induced Metal Deposition 433 Appendices 437 A.1 List ofMajor Symbols 437 A.2 Physical Constants 440 A.3 Lattice Parameters of Semiconductors 440 A.4 Properties of Important Semiconductors 441 A.5 Effective Density of States and Intrinsic Carrier Densities 441 A.6 Major Redox Systems and Corresponding Standard Potentials 442 A.6.1 Aqueous Solutions 442 A.6.2 In Acetonitrile (vs Ag/AgCl) 442 A.7 Potentials of Reference Electrodes 443 References 445 Index 465
£116.41
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Process Plant Design: Project Management from Inquiry to Acceptance
a huge range and FREE tracked UK delivery on ALL orders.
£91.76
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics of Biotech Drugs: Principles and Case Studies in Drug Development
a huge range and FREE tracked UK delivery on ALL orders.
£999.99
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Vliesstoffe: Rohstoffe, Herstellung, Anwendung, Eigenschaften, Prüfung
Book SynopsisSeit der ersten Auflage dieses Referenzwerks gab es sowohl im Bereich der Herstellung als auch Anwendung von Vliesstoffen eine Reihe innovativer Neuerungen, und die weltweite Vliesstoffproduktion hat sich nahezu verdoppelt. Diesen Entwicklungen wird in der zweiten, komplett überarbeiteten Auflage Rechnung getragen und vermittelt allen Vliesstoff-Interessierten - vom Polymerchemiker bis zum Anwender - ein vertieftes Verständnis dieses dynamischen Gebiets. Neben neuen Herstellungsverfahren wie Meltblown, Nanoval, Airlaid, Elektrospinnen sowie Ultraschallverfestigung wurden auch die verschiedenen Verfahren zur Oberflächenmodifizierung, Konfektionierung und zum Recycling von Vliesstoffen mit aufgenommen. Ein besonderer Schwerpunkt liegt bei Vliesstoffen für technische Anwendungen wie Isolation, Schutztextilien und Filtern. Ein separater Abschnitt über Prüfverfahren für Rohstoffe, Zwischen- und Endprodukte erhöht den Wert als unentbehrliches Nachschlagewerk.Trade Review"Dieses Buch bietet umfassende Information über Vliesstoffe, von den Fasern über die verschiedenen Verarbeitungsverfahren bis zu der Verwendung von Vliesstoffen. Es ist das Standardwerk der nächsten Jahre!" Chemie Ingenieur Technik. CIT-Journal (04/2018) "Die Liste der Autoren ist lang; genannt sind 78 Namen, was beweist, wie umfassend und sorgfältig das Werk in der neuesten Auflage zusammengestellt wurde." Werkstoffe in der Fertigung (4/2012, 01.09.2012) "eine umfassende 'Vliesstoff-Bibel'" Technische Textilien (4/2012, 01.09.2012) "Für eine Industrie mit lang anhaltendem kontinuierlichen Wachstum und einem Umsatz von heute 14-15 Milliarden USD/ Jahr war es allerhöchste Zeit, dass dieses Buch in überarbeiteter, stark aktualisierter Form erscheint... Insgesamt ist dieses Buch für Forschung, Aus und Weiterbildung und die Industrie sicher ein Muss." KU - KunststoffeTable of ContentsVorwort XXI Vorwort zur 1. Auflage XXIII Liste der Autoren XXV 0 Einführung 1 0.1 Definition und Einsatz von Vliesstoffen 1 0.2 Kurzer Überblick zu den Vliesstoffproduktionsprozessen 3 0.3 Entwicklung der Vliesstoffindustrie 4 0.3.1 1972−2011: Vier Jahrzehnte Vliesstoffproduktion mit ausgeprägter Charakteristik 4 0.3.2 1972−1981: Die Zeit der Pioniere 5 0.3.3 1982−1991: Gesundes Wachstum und Attraktivität 7 0.3.4 1992−2001: Das Zeitalter der Reife. und Unsicherheit 9 0.3.5 2002−2009: Das Phänomen Wassergestrahlte Wischtücher 11 0.4 Trendanalyse 13 0.4.1 Rohmaterialverbrauch 14 0.4.2 Geographische Betrachtungen 14 0.4.3 Ökonomische Perspektive 15 0.5 Zusammenfassung und Ausblick 15 1 Faserstoffe 21 1.1 Naturfasern 21 1.1.1 Pflanzliche Fasern 23 1.1.1.1 Baumwolle (Gossypium) 23 1.1.1.2 Flachs (Linum usitatissimum Linné) 24 1.1.1.3 Jute (Corchorus) 25 1.1.1.4 Sisal (Agave sisalana) 25 1.1.1.5 Kokos (Cocos nucifera) 25 1.1.2 Tierische Fasern 25 1.1.2.1 Wolle (Ovis aries L.) 25 1.1.2.2 Seide (Bomby mori L.) 26 1.2 Chemiefasern 26 1.2.1 Chemiefasern aus natürlichen Polymeren 26 1.2.1.1 Cellulosische Chemiefasern 26 1.2.1.2 Chemiefasern aus Cellulosederivaten 30 1.2.1.3 Fasern aus Biokunststoffen 31 1.2.2 Chemiefasern aus synthetischen Polymeren 33 1.2.2.1 Polyesterfasern (PES) 33 1.2.2.2 Polyamidfasern (PA) 34 1.2.2.3 Polyolefinfasern (PO, PT, PE) 37 1.2.2.4 Polyacrylfasern (PAN) 38 1.2.2.5 Polyvinylalkoholfasern (PVA) 39 1.2.2.6 Aramidfasern (PAI) 40 1.2.2.7 Melaminharzfasern (MF) 41 1.2.3 Chemiefasern aus anorganischen Polymeren 42 1.2.3.1 Glasfasern 42 1.2.3.2 Silikatfasern 43 1.2.3.3 Keramikfasern 44 1.2.3.4 Kohlenstofffasern 45 1.2.3.5 Kohlenstoffnanoröhren − CNT 45 1.2.3.6 Metallfasern und metallisierte Fasern 46 1.2.4 Modifikation von Chemiefaserstoffen 47 1.3 Reißfasern 48 1.3.1 Das Ausgangsmaterial Textilabfall 49 1.3.2 Der Reißprozess 50 1.3.2.1 Materialvorbehandlung 51 1.3.2.2 Die Strukturauflösung 51 1.3.2.3 Nachbehandlung 53 1.3.3 Reißfaserqualität 54 1.3.3.1 Charakterisierung der Reißfaserqualität 55 1.3.3.2 Beeinflussung der Reißfaserqualität bei der Reißfaserherstellung 56 1.3.4 Reißfasereinsatz 57 2 Andere Rohstoffe 61 2.1 Fluff-Zellstoff 61 2.2 Granulate 62 2.2.1 Allgemeine Betrachtung der physikalischen Eigenschaften 63 2.2.1.1 Polyolefine 66 2.2.1.2 Polyester 68 2.2.1.3 Polyamide 69 2.3 Pulver 70 2.3.1 Polymerpulver 71 2.3.1.1 Polyacrylnitril 71 2.3.1.2 Additive 72 2.3.1.3 Stabilisatoren 73 2.4 Superabsorber 76 2.4.1 Absorptionsmechanismus 76 2.4.2 Herstellungsverfahren 77 2.4.2.1 Suspensionspolymerisation 77 2.4.2.2 Lösungspolymerisation 77 2.4.2.3 Nachvernetzung 78 2.4.2.4 Permeabilität 79 2.4.3 Testmethoden 79 2.4.3.1 Produktkenndaten 80 2.4.3.2 Märkte und Anwendungen 81 2.4.3.3 Zusammenfassung 82 2.5 Präparationen 83 2.5.1 Allgemeines 83 2.5.1.1 Definitionen 83 2.5.1.2 Anforderungen an Präparationen 84 2.5.1.3 Zusammensetzungen von Präparationen 85 2.5.2 Aufbringung von Präparationen 86 2.5.2.1 Chemiefaserherstellung 86 2.5.2.2 Verarbeitung 86 2.5.3 Prüfmethoden 87 2.5.3.1 Prüfungen am Präparationsmittel 87 2.5.3.2 Prüfungen am präparierten Fasermaterial 88 2.5.4 Präparationen auf Vliesstoffen 89 2.5.4.1 Allgemeines 89 2.5.4.2 Vliesstoffherstellung und Präparation 90 2.5.4.3 Endprodukt und Präparation 91 2.5.4.4 Spinnvliesstoffe und Präparationen 91 2.5.5 Ausblick 92 3 Bindemittel 97 3.1 Einleitung 97 3.2 Bindeflüssigkeiten 99 3.2.1 Anwendungsbereiche für Latex 99 3.2.2 Latex − Herstellung, Zusammensetzung, Typen 100 3.2.2.1 Übersicht 100 3.2.2.2 Latex-Herstellung 100 3.2.2.3 Latex-Bestandteile 101 3.2.2.4 Latex-Produktklassen für die Vliesverfestigung 102 3.2.2.5 Nanoteilchen 103 3.2.3 Filmbildung 104 3.2.3.1 Modellvorstellung 104 3.2.3.2 Interdiffusion, Vernetzung, Adhäsion 105 3.2.4 Vliesverfestigung mittels Latexflotte 106 3.2.4.1 Die Latexflotte als modifizierter Latex 106 3.2.4.2 Filmbildung bei der Vliesverfestigung 107 3.2.4.3 Unterscheidungsmerkmale für Latizes 109 3.2.5 Qualitätsaspekte 110 3.2.5.1 Latex und Latexflotte 110 3.2.5.2 Film 110 3.2.5.3 Vliesstoff 110 3.3 Bindefasern 111 3.3.1 Lösliche Fasern 111 3.3.2 Schmelzbindefasern 111 3.3.2.1 Aufmachungsformen 113 3.3.2.2 Chemischer Aufbau 113 3.3.2.3 Funktionsweise 115 3.3.2.4 Eigenschaften 116 II Herstellungsverfahren für Vliesstoffe 119 4 Trockenverfahren 123 4.1 Faservliese 123 4.1.1 Faservorbereitung 123 4.1.1.1 Ballenvorlage 124 4.1.1.2 Öffnen 125 4.1.1.3 Dosieren 127 4.1.1.4 Mischen 128 4.1.1.5 Speisevlies bilden 130 4.1.1.6 Anlagen 133 4.1.2 Faservliese nach dem Kardierverfahren 136 4.1.2.1 Krempeltheorie 137 4.1.2.2 Anlagentechnik 144 4.1.2.3 Vliesbildung 147 4.1.2.4 Die Vliesstreckung 155 4.1.3 Faservliese nach aerodynamischen Verfahren 158 4.1.3.1 Das Airlay-Verfahren 159 4.1.3.2 Das Airlaid-Verfahren 168 4.1.3.3 Sonderverfahren 171 4.1.4 Faservliesstoffe mit senkrechter Faserlage 171 4.1.4.1 Vibrationssenkrechtleger 172 4.1.4.2 Rotationssenkrechtleger 173 4.1.4.3 Verfestigung senkrecht gelegter Faservliese 173 4.2 Extrusionsvliesstoffe 175 4.2.1 Einleitung 175 4.2.2 Polymereinsatz 176 4.2.2.1 Polymere für das Schmelzspinnen (Filament-Spinnvliesverfahren) 176 4.2.2.2 Polymere für das Schmelzspinnen (Meltblown-Verfahren) 179 4.2.2.3 Polymere für das Lösungsspinnen 180 4.2.2.4 Additive für die Funktionalisierung 180 4.2.3 Grundsätzliches zur Verfahrenstechnik und -technologie 182 4.2.4 Verfahren zur Herstellung von Spinnvliesstoffen und Spinnvlies-Verbundstoffen 188 4.2.4.1 Schmelzspinnverfahren 188 4.2.4.2 Lösungsspinnverfahren 202 4.2.5 Vliesverfestigung 205 4.2.5.1 Thermische Verfestigung 206 4.2.5.2 Mechanische Verfestigung 209 4.2.5.3 Chemische Verfestigung 212 4.2.5.4 Flächenreckung 213 4.2.6 Spinnvliestechnologien in den Submikrometerbereich 213 4.2.6.1 Elektrostatik-Spinnvliesverfahren 214 4.2.6.2 Zentrifugenspinnen 216 4.2.7 Verfahren zur Herstellung von Foliefaser-Vliesstoffen 216 5 Nassverfahren 229 5.1 Verfahrensprinzip 230 5.2 Rohstoffe und Faservorbereitung 230 5.2.1 Spezielle Faserrohstoffaspekte 231 5.2.2 Faserstoffarten 232 5.2.3 Bindemittel 232 5.2.4 Pumpen 234 5.3 Aufbau von Nassvliesanlagen 234 5.3.1 Anlagen zur Herstellung von Teebeutelpapieren 235 5.3.1.1 Stoffaufbereitung für einlagige Produkte 235 5.3.1.2 Stoffaufbereitung für mehrlagige Produkte 237 5.3.2 Anlagen zur Herstellung von Filterpapieren 238 5.3.3 Vliesbildung 239 5.3.3.1 Erste Entwicklungsschritte auf einer Nassvlies-Laboranlage 239 5.3.3.2 Weitere Schritte auf einer Nassvlies-Pilotanlage 239 5.3.4 Verfestigen der Vliesstoffbahn 246 5.3.4.1 Zugabe von Bindefasern bzw. BiCo-Fasern 246 5.3.4.2 Zugabe von Bindemitteldispersionen in der Masse 246 5.3.4.3 Bindemittelzugabe auf die Vliesstoffbahn 246 5.3.4.4 Aufgießen der Binderdispersion 247 5.3.4.5 Schaumimprägnierung 247 5.3.4.6 Leimpresse / Imprägnierpresse / Filmpresse 247 5.3.4.7 Pressen 247 5.3.5 Vliestrocknung 247 5.3.5.1 Zylindertrocknung 248 5.3.5.2 Durchströmtrockner 248 5.3.5.3 Kanaltrockner 248 5.3.5.4 Strahlungstrocknung 249 5.3.6 Aufrollung 249 5.4 Verfahren zur Herstellung von Spinnvliesstoffen aus natürlichen Polymeren 249 6 Vliesverfestigung 255 6.1 Vernadelungsverfahren 255 6.1.1 Einfluss des Vliesbildungsverfahrens 256 6.1.2 Vernadelungsprinzip 259 6.1.2.1 Nadelbalkensystem 259 6.1.2.2 Einstichtechnologie 260 6.1.2.3 Einstichtiefe 261 6.1.2.4 Niederhalterstellung 261 6.1.2.5 Einstichdichte 267 6.1.3 Vlieszufuhr und Vorvernadelung 270 6.1.4 Vernadelungszone 271 6.1.4.1 Nadelbild 272 6.1.5 Vliesabzug 274 6.1.5.1 Positiver Vliestransport 274 6.1.5.2 Nadelvliesverstreckung 279 6.1.6 Arten der Nachvernadelung 282 6.1.6.1 Beidseitig alternierend 283 6.1.6.2 Beidseitig simultan 283 6.1.6.3 Vernadelungslinie 283 6.1.6.4 Vernadeln mehrschichtiger Vliese 284 6.1.6.5 Hochleistungsvernadelung 285 6.1.7 Papiermaschinenbespannungen (PMF) 290 6.1.7.1 PMF-Vorvernadelung 290 6.1.7.2 PMF-Endvernadelung 290 6.1.7.3 BELTEX-Verfahren 292 6.1.8 Modifizierte Vernadelungstechniken 293 6.1.8.1 Rundvernadelungsverfahren 293 6.1.8.2 Schrägvernadelungsverfahren 294 6.1.9 Einflussparameter für Nadelvliesstoffeigenschaften 296 6.1.9.1 Vernadelungsparameter 297 6.1.10 Oberflächenstrukturierung 307 6.1.10.1 Strukturierung mit positivem Vliestransport 309 6.1.11 Nadelcharakteristik 311 6.1.11.1 Filznadelgruppen 311 6.2 Maschenbildungsverfahren 318 6.2.1 Verfahrenssystematik 320 6.2.1.1 Vlies-Nähwirkverfahren 321 6.2.1.2 Faser-Vlieswirkverfahren 327 6.2.1.3 Polfaser-Vlieswirkverfahren mit Grundbahn 332 6.2.1.4 Polfaser-Vlieswirkverfahren ohne Grundbahn 334 6.2.1.5 Maschen-Vlieswirkverfahren 336 6.2.2 Kettenwirken 338 6.2.3 Stricken 339 6.3 Verwirbelungsverfahren 340 6.3.1 Verfahrensentwicklung 340 6.3.1.1 Physikalische Grundlagen 343 6.3.1.2 Verwirbelungsvorgang 345 6.3.1.3 Wirbelvliesstoffe 348 6.3.2 Faserstoff- und Prozesseinflüsse 349 6.3.2.1 Faserstoffeinflüsse 349 6.3.2.2 Prozesseinflüsse 351 6.3.3 Verfestigungsanlagen 352 6.3.4 Vliesverfestigung mit Dampfstrahlen 357 6.4 Thermische Verfahren 359 6.4.1 Trocknung 359 6.4.1.1 Konvektionstrocknung 360 6.4.1.2 Kontakttrocknung 373 6.4.1.3 Strahlungstrocknung 374 6.4.2 Heißluftverfestigung 375 6.4.2.1 Grundsätzliches 375 6.4.2.2 Verfahrenstechnik 377 6.4.2.3 Anlagentechnik 380 6.4.3 Thermofixierung 382 6.4.4 Thermische Kalanderverfestigung (Thermobonding Prozess) 385 6.4.4.1 Verfahrenstechnik 385 6.4.4.2 Anlagentechnik 389 6.4.5 Ultraschall-Verfestigung 391 6.4.5.1 Definition Ultraschall 391 6.4.5.2 Systemkomponenten 392 6.4.5.3 Funktionsprinzip 393 6.4.5.4 Vorteile des Ultraschallverfahrens 394 6.5 Chemische Verfahren 395 6.5.1 Adhäsion und Kohäsion 395 6.5.2 Kohäsive Verfestigung 397 6.5.3 Adhäsive Verfestigung 397 6.6 Verbundstoffe 398 6.6.1 Vliesverbundstoffe 398 6.6.1.1 Aus Schichten aufgebaute Vliesverbundstoffe 398 6.6.1.2 Durch Fadenschlingen verstärkte Vliesverbundstoffe 398 6.6.1.3 Verfahrensvarianten 399 6.6.1.4 Verbinden durch Vernadeln 399 6.6.1.5 Verbinden durch Nähwirken 405 6.6.1.6 Verbinden durch Verwirbeln 405 6.6.1.7 Verbinden durch Verkleben 406 6.6.2 Vliesstoffe für Verbundwerkstoffe 409 7 Mechanische und chemische Ausrüstung von Vliesstoffen 417 7.1 Schrumpfen 417 7.1.1 Entstehen und Beseitigung von Verzügen 417 7.1.2 Gewolltes Schrumpfen 417 7.2 Stauchen und Kreppen 417 7.2.1 Stauchen – das Clupakverfahren 418 7.2.2 Kreppen – das Micrexverfahren 418 7.3 Glätten, Kalandern, Pressen 418 7.3.1 Glätt- bzw. Rollkalander 418 7.3.2 Präge- oder Gaufrierkalander 418 7.3.3 Muldenpressen 419 7.3.4 Formpressen, Stanzen 419 7.4 Perforieren, Schlitzen, Brechen 419 7.4.1 Perforieren 419 7.4.2 Schlitzen 420 7.4.3 Brechen 420 7.5 Spalten, Schleifen, Velourieren, Scheren, Rauen 420 7.5.1 Spalten 420 7.5.2 Schleifen, Velourieren 420 7.5.3 Scheren, Rauen 421 7.6 Sengen 421 7.7 Nähen, Steppen, Schweißen 421 7.7.1 Nähen und Steppen 421 7.7.2 Ultraschallschweißen 421 7.7.3 Hochfrequenzschweißen 422 7.7.4 Plasma- und Coronabehandlungen 422 7.8 Sonstige mechanische Ausrüstungsverfahren 423 7.9 Waschen 423 7.10 Färben 424 7.10.1 Flocke- und Spinnfärbung 424 7.10.2 Färben und Binden 424 7.10.3 Nachträgliches Färben 424 7.10.4 Verschiedene Färbemethoden 425 7.10.5 Kaltverweilverfahren 425 7.10.6 Kontinuefärben 425 7.11 Drucken 425 7.11.1 Drucken von Leichtvliesstoffen 426 7.11.2 Drucken schwerer Vliesstoffe (Fußbodenbeläge) 426 7.11.3 Spritz-, Tintenstrahl-, Inkjetdruck 426 7.11.4 Transferdruck 427 7.12 Appretieren, Weichmachen, Spezialeffekte 427 7.12.1 Maschinelle Gegebenheiten und Möglichkeiten 428 7.12.2 Steifappreturen 428 7.12.3 Weichmachen 429 7.12.4 Antistatische Ausrüstung 429 7.12.5 Schmutzabweisende Ausrüstung 430 7.12.6 Hydrophobieren, Oleophobieren 430 7.12.7 Hygieneausrüstung, Kosmeto- und Wellnesstextilien 430 7.12.8 Flammfestausrüstung 431 7.12.9 Saugfähige und wasserbindende Ausrüstung 431 7.12.10 Staubbindende Behandlung 432 7.13 Beschichten 433 7.13.1 Beschichtungsverfahren 433 7.13.1.1 Pflatschen 433 7.13.1.2 Beschichten durch Tiefdruck 433 7.13.1.3 Beschichten durch Rotationsdruck 433 7.13.1.4 Streichen oder Rakeln 434 7.13.1.5 Extrudieren 434 7.13.1.6 Berührungsloses Beschichten 434 7.13.1.7 Umkehrverfahren (Release-Coating) 434 7.13.2 Beschichtungseffekte 435 7.13.2.1 Rutschfestausrüstung 435 7.13.2.2 Verformbare Beschichtung 435 7.13.2.3 Selbstklebebeschichtung 435 7.13.2.4 Schaumbeschichtung 436 7.13.2.5 Selbstliegebeschichtung 437 7.13.2.6 Mikroporöse Beschichtung 437 7.13.2.7 Drainagebeschichtung 438 7.13.2.8 Heißsiegelbeschichtung 438 7.14 Kaschieren 440 7.14.1 Nasskaschierung 440 7.14.2 Trockenkaschierung 440 7.14.2.1 Anwendung von Klebevliesstoffen 441 7.14.3 Beispiele für Kaschierungen 441 7.15 Beflocken 441 7.16 Neue Verfahren und Produkte 442 7.16.1 Ökologie und Ökonomie 443 III Konfektionen von Vliesstoffen 449 8 Konfektion von Fertigprodukten 451 8.1 Begriffe und Definitionen 451 8.2 Produktentwicklung 453 8.2.1 Produktentwicklung für Bekleidungstextilien 453 8.2.2 Produktentwicklung für Wohn- und Heimtextilien 457 8.2.3 Produktentwicklung für technische Textilien 457 8.3 Produktionsvorbereitung 458 8.4 Produktion 460 8.4.1 Legen der Stofflagen 460 8.4.2 Zuschnitt 462 8.4.2.1 Konventionelle Zuschnitttechnik 463 8.4.2.2 Automatische Zuschnittanlagen 465 8.4.3 Verbindungsprozess und Montage 467 8.4.4 Bügeln 474 8.5 Verpacken 475 8.6 Mechanisierung und Automatisierung 476 IV Eigenschaften und Anwendung der Vliesstoffe 479 9 Hygieneerzeugnisse 481 9.1 Inkontinenzprodukte (Windeln) 482 9.2 OP-Textilien 484 9.3 Bereichs- und Berufsbekleidung 485 9.4 Antimikrobiell ausgerüstete Vliese 485 9.5 Damenhygieneprodukte (Binden, Tampons) 486 10 Vliesstoffe für Medizin 489 10.1 Gesetzliche Grundlagen 489 10.2 Einwegtextilien oder Mehrwegtextilien 490 10.3 Vliesstoffe für Medizinprodukte 491 10.4 Weiterentwicklung 492 11 Vliesstoffe für Reinigungsprodukte und Oberflächenpflege 493 11.1 Marktsituation 494 11.2 Nass- und Feuchtreinigungsprodukte 494 11.2.1 Bodentücher und Materialien für Bodenreinigungssysteme 496 11.2.2 Wischtücher (Mehrweg) 497 11.2.3 Einwegtücher (Disposables) 497 11.2.3.1 Trockene Staubentfernung am Boden mit Einwegtüchern 497 11.2.3.2 Feuchte Reinigung am Boden mit Einwegtüchern 498 11.2.3.3 Spezielle Oberflächenreinigungsverfahren mit Einwegtüchern 498 11.2.4 Syntheseleder-Tücher 498 11.3 Trocken- und Feuchtreinigungsprodukte 499 11.3.1 Mikrofaservliesstoffe 499 11.3.2 Polyvinylalkohol-Vliesstoffprodukte 500 11.3.3 Imprägnierte Tücher 501 11.4 Scheuermedien 501 11.4.1 Topfreiniger, Scheuerschwämme und -pads 501 11.4.2 Bodenreinigungsscheiben 502 12 Vliesstoffe für Heimtextilien 505 12.1 Vliesstoffe in Polstermöbeln 505 12.2 Vliesstoffe in Matratzen 507 12.3 Vliesstoffe in Fußbodenbelägen 508 12.4 Vliesstoffe als Dekorationsmaterialien 510 12.5 Tuftingträger 512 12.5.1 Gegenüberstellung der zwei unterschiedlichen Flächenkonstruktionen 513 12.5.2 Definition der an den Träger gestellten Anforderungen 514 13 Vliesstoffe für Bekleidung 517 13.1 Einlagevliesstoffe 517 13.1.1 Einleitung 517 13.1.2 Geschichte der Einlagevliesstoffe 517 13.1.3 Funktionen von Einlagevliesstoffen 518 13.1.3.1 Einlagestoffe zur Formgebung und Formunterstützung 519 13.1.3.2 Einlagevliesstoff zur Stabilisierung und/oder Versteifung 519 13.1.3.3 Einlagevliesstoff zur Volumengebung 519 13.1.4 Eigenschaften der Einlagevliesstoffe 519 13.1.5 Funktionsträger der Einlagevliesstoffe 521 13.2 Vliesstoffe für Schutzkleidung 521 13.2.1 Anforderungen an Schutzkleidung 522 13.2.2 Chemikalien/Aerosol/Staubschutz-Bekleidung 524 13.2.3 Nässe- und Kälteschutzbekleidung 527 13.2.4 Hitzeschutzbekleidung 528 13.3 Trägervliesstoffe für Schuhe 529 14 Vliesstoffe für technische Anwendungen 539 14.1 Isolation 539 14.1.1 Feuer, Wärme, Schall 539 14.1.1.1 Isolation gegen Feuer/Hitze 539 14.1.1.2 Wärmeisolierung 542 14.1.1.3 Schallisolation 546 14.1.2 Vliesstoffanwendungen in der Elektrotechnik 548 14.1.3 Kabelummantelung 553 14.1.3.1 Allgemeines 553 14.1.3.2 Klebebänder aus Maliwatt 554 14.1.3.3 Klebebänder aus Malivlies 555 14.1.3.4 Klebebänder aus Kunit-Multiknit 556 14.2 Filtration 557 14.2.1 Trockenfiltration 562 14.2.1.1 Allgemeines 562 14.2.1.2 Funktionelle Anforderungen, Eigenschaften 565 14.2.1.3 Oberflächenfilter 566 14.2.1.4 Tiefenfilter 569 14.2.2 Flüssigkeitsfiltration 573 14.2.2.1 Flüssigkeitsfilter auf Vliesstoffbasis 575 14.2.2.2 Bauarten für Flüssigkeitsfilter 577 14.3 Bauwesen 579 14.3.1 Geovliesstoffe 579 14.3.1.1 Grundlagen 579 14.3.1.2 Funktionen und Anforderungen 581 14.3.1.3 Anwendungsfälle für Vliesstoffe 584 14.3.2 Dachbahnen 588 14.3.2.1 Einleitung 588 14.3.2.3 Eingesetzte Polyestervliesstoffe 589 14.3.2.4 Herstellung von Dachbahnen / Bitumierung 589 14.3.2.5 Entwicklungstrends 590 14.3.2.6 Recycling von Dachbahnen 590 14.4 Landwirtschaft 591 14.4.1 Einleitung 591 14.4.2 Anforderungen an Agrarvliesstoffe 591 14.4.3 Technologische Verfahren 592 14.4.4 Anwendungsbeispiele 592 14.4.5 Markttendenz 594 14.5 Fahrzeugindustrie 595 14.5.1 Markt 595 14.5.2 Automobilindustrie 596 14.5.2.1 Eigenschaftsanforderungen 600 14.5.2.2 Sitzpolster, Laminiervliesstoffe, Verkleidungsteile 605 14.5.2.3 Schall- und Wärmeisolation im Automobil 609 14.5.2.4 Synthetische Filtermedien für den mobilen Einsatz 613 14.5.3 Flugzeugindustrie, Schiffsbau, Eisenbahn 619 14.5.4 Ausblick 620 14.6 Papiermaschinenbespannungen 620 14.7 Simulation von Vliesstoffeigenschaften 624 14.7.1 Generierung virtueller Vliesstoffe 625 14.7.2 Eigenschaftsberechnung 626 14.7.2.1 Geometrische Charakterisierung 626 14.7.2.2 Strömungseigenschaften 626 14.7.2.3 Filtrationseigenschaften 627 14.7.2.4 Optimierung von Vliesstoffeigenschaften 628 14.7.3 Zukünftige Entwicklungen 628 15 Verwertung von Vliesstoffen 639 15.1 Produktionsabfälle aus der Vliesstoffherstellung 639 15.2 Vliesstoffabfälle nach dem Gebrauch 641 15.2.1 Einwegprodukte 641 15.2.2 Dauerhafte Produkte 641 15.3 Verwertungsmöglichkeiten für Vliesstoffabfälle 642 15.3.1 Mechanische Verfahren zur Faserrückgewinnung 642 15.3.2 Regranulierung 642 15.3.3 Herstellung von Textilschnitzeln und deren Verwendungsmöglichkeiten 643 15.3.4 Verarbeitung von Vliesstoffrandstreifen auf KEMAFIL®-Maschinen 644 15.3.5 Zweitverwertung von Vliesstoffabfällen 644 V Richtlinien und Prüfverfahren für Vliesrohstoffe und Vliesstoffe 647 16 Prüfverfahren 649 16.1 Allgemeine Grundlagen 649 16.1.1 Probenahme und Statistik 649 16.1.2 Prüfklima 650 16.1.3 Normen und Richtlinien 650 16.2 Vliesrohstoffe 651 16.2.1 Fasern 651 16.2.1.1 Faserstoffanalyse 651 16.2.2 Granulate 655 16.2.3 Bindemittel 656 16.3 Vliesstoffe 657 16.3.1 Textilphysikalische Prüfungen 657 16.3.2 Prüfung von Echtheiten 667 16.3.3 Prüfung des Brennverhaltens 674 16.3.4 Prüfung des Pflegeverhaltens 679 16.3.5 Humanökologische Prüfungen 680 16.4 Einsatzbezogene Prüfverfahren 683 16.4.1 Hygiene- und Medizinerzeugnisse 683 16.4.2 Reinigungstücher und Haushalterzeugnisse 684 16.4.3 Heimtextilien 684 16.4.4 Schutzkleidung 685 16.4.5 Filterstoffe 687 16.4.6 Geovliesstoffe 692 17 Qualitätsüberwachungs- und Qualitätssicherungssysteme für Produkte, Maschinen und Anlagen 699 18 Ausblick auf die zukünftige Entwicklung der Vliesstoffindustrie 711 Index 717
£140.25
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Polyolefin Reaction Engineering
a huge range and FREE tracked UK delivery on ALL orders.
£999.99
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Concepts of Nanochemistry
Book SynopsisAuthored by a rising star in the field and one of its pioneers, this textbook is ideal for interdisciplinary courses - bridging chemistry, materials science, physics and biology. Adopting a completely new and visionary approach, this is a unique learning tool, focusing on just six concepts crucial for understanding nanochemistry: surface, size, shape, self-assembly, defects and the interface of biology and nanochemistry. These concepts are elucidated through the analysis of six materials representing the real life application of the nanochemistry concepts. The teaching questions included provide real "food for thought", thus training students to think as a researcher does and so develop problemsolving skills.Trade Review"The book Concepts can serve as a superb guide into nanochemistry for university teachers, students, and the interested general public. It can be emphatically recommended. Read it, or you will be missing something extraordinary." (Angewandte Chemie, 2010) Table of ContentsForeword xi About the Authors xiii Acknowledgments xvii Introduction 1 Nanochemistry – Why Should We Care? 1 What is Nanochemistry? 4 This Book – Instructions for Use 7 References 10 1 An Introduction to Nanochemistry Concepts 11 1.1 Nanochemistry – What’s in a Name? 11 1.2 On the Surface of Things 12 1.3 Size is Everything. . .Almost 19 1.4 Shape 23 1.5 Self-Assembly 26 1.6 Two Words About Defects 34 1.7 The Bio–Nano Interface 37 1.8 Safety 45 References 47 2 Silica 51 2.1 Introduction 51 2.2 Surface 52 2.3 Size 56 2.4 Shape 61 2.5 Self-Assembly 64 2.6 Defects 71 2.7 BioNano 75 2.8 Conclusion 78 2.9 Silica – NanoFood for Thought 79 References 82 3 Gold 85 3.1 Introduction 85 3.2 Surface 85 3.3 Size 89 3.4 Shape 94 3.5 Self-Assembly 97 3.6 Defects 100 3.7 BioNano 104 3.8 Gold – NanoFood for Thought 107 References 110 4 Polydimethylsiloxane 113 4.1 Introduction 113 4.2 Surface 114 4.3 Size 118 4.4 Shape 123 4.5 Self-Assembly 128 4.6 Defects 131 4.7 BioNano 132 4.8 PDMS – NanoFood for Thought 137 References 139 5 Cadmium Selenide 141 5.1 Introduction 141 5.2 Surface 142 5.3 Size 145 5.4 Shape 151 5.5 Self-Assembly 157 5.6 Defects 160 5.7 BioNano 163 5.8 CdSe – NanoFood for Thought 167 References 170 6 Iron Oxide 173 6.1 Introduction 173 6.2 Surface 173 6.3 Size 179 6.4 Shape 184 6.5 Self-Assembly 187 6.6 BioNano 189 6.7 Iron Oxide – NanoFood for Thought 193 References 194 7 Carbon 197 7.1 Introduction 197 7.2 Surface 198 7.3 Size 203 7.4 Shape 205 7.5 Self-Assembly 207 7.6 BioNano 211 7.7 Conclusion 213 7.8 Carbon – NanoFood for Thought 214 References 216 8 Nanochemistry Case Histories 217 8.1 Introduction 217 8.2 Case #1 218 8.3 Case #2 225 8.4 Conclusions 232 References 233 9 Nanochemistry Diagnostics 235 9.1 A Reference Sheet 235 9.2 Microscopy Techniques 235 9.3 Diffraction Techniques 238 9.4 Spectroscopic Techniques 239 9.5 Magnetic Techniques 242 9.6 Separation Techniques 243 9.7 Thermal Techniques 243 9.8 Adsorption Techniques 243 9.9 Electrical Techniques 244 10 Challenges in Nanochemistry 245 References 249 Index 251
£999.99
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Greener Fischer-Tropsch Processes: For Fuels and Feedstocks
a huge range and FREE tracked UK delivery on ALL orders.
£999.99
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Technische Rheologie in Beispielen und Berechnungen
a huge range and FREE tracked UK delivery on ALL orders.
£999.99
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Charge and Energy Transfer Dynamics in Molecular
Book SynopsisCharge and Energy Transfer Dynamics in Molecular Systems Comprehensive resource offering knowledge on charge and energy transfer dynamics in molecular systems and nanostructures Charge and Energy Transfer Dynamics in Molecular Systems provides a unified description of different charge and energy transfer phenomena in molecular systems with emphasis on the theory, bridging the regimes of coherent and dissipative dynamics and thus presenting classic rate theories as well as modern treatments of ultrafast phenomena. Starting from microscopic models, the common features of the different transfer processes are highlighted, along with applications ranging from vibrational energy flow in large polyatomic molecules, the motion of protons in solution, up to the concerted dynamics of electronic and nuclear degrees of freedom in molecules and molecular aggregates. The newly revised and updated Fourth Edition contains a more detailed coverage of recent developments in density matrix theory, mixed quantum-classical methods for dynamics simulations, and a substantially expanded treatment of time-resolved spectroscopy. The book is written in an easy-to-follow style, including detailed mathematical derivations, thus making even complex concepts understandable and applicable. Charge and Energy Transfer Dynamics in Molecular Systems includes information on: Electronic and vibrational molecular states, covering molecular Schrödinger equation, Born—Oppenheimer separation and approximation, Hartree-Fock equations and other electronic structure methods Dynamics of isolated and open quantum systems, covering multidimensional wave packet dynamics, and different variants of density operator equations Interaction of molecular systems with radiation fields, covering linear and nonlinear optical response using the correlation function approach Intramolecular electronic transitions, covering optical transition and internal conversion processes Transfer processes of electrons, protons, and electronic excitation energy Providing in-depth coverage of the subject, Charge and Energy Transfer Dynamics in Molecular Systems is an essential resource for anyone working on timely problems of energy and charge transfer in physics, chemistry and biophysics as well as for all engaged in nanoscience and organic electronics.Table of ContentsPreface to the Fourth Edition xiii Preface to the Third Edition xv Preface to the Second Edition xvii Preface to the First Edition xix 1 Introduction 1 2 Electronic and Vibrational Molecular States 7 2.1 Introduction 7 2.2 Molecular Schrödinger Equation 9 2.3 Born–Oppenheimer Separation 11 2.3.1 Born–Oppenheimer Approximation 13 2.4 Electronic Structure Methods 15 2.4.1 The Hartree–Fock Equations 17 2.4.2 Density Functional Theory 19 2.5 Potential Energy Surfaces 21 2.5.1 Harmonic Approximation and Normal Mode Analysis 24 2.5.2 Operator Representation of the Normal Mode Hamiltonian 27 2.5.3 Construction of System–Bath Models 31 2.6 Adiabatic versus Diabatic Representation of the Molecular Hamiltonian 36 2.6.1 Adiabatic Picture 36 2.6.2 Diabatic Picture 37 2.6.3 Two-State Case 40 2.7 Condensed-phase Approaches 42 2.7.1 Dielectric Continuum Model 43 2.7.1.1 Medium Electrostatics 43 2.7.1.2 Reaction Field Model 47 2.7.2 Explicit Quantum-classical Solvent Model 49 2.8 Supplement 51 2.8.1 Franck–Condon Factors 51 2.8.2 The Two-level System 52 2.8.3 The Linear Molecular Chain and the Molecular Ring 55 References 57 Further Reading 57 3 Dynamics of Isolated and Open Quantum Systems 59 3.1 Introduction 60 3.2 Time-dependent Schrödinger Equation 66 3.2.1 Wave Packets 66 3.2.2 The Interaction Representation 69 3.2.3 Multidimensional Wave Packet Dynamics 71 3.3 The Golden Rule of Quantum Mechanics 75 3.3.1 Transition from a Single State into a Continuum 75 3.3.2 Transition Rate for a Thermal Ensemble 78 3.3.3 Green’s Function Approach 81 3.4 The Nonequilibrium Statistical Operator and the Density Matrix 84 3.4.1 The Density Operator 84 3.4.2 The Density Matrix 86 3.4.3 Equation of Motion for the Density Operator 88 3.4.4 Wigner Representation of the Density Operator 90 3.4.5 Dynamics of Coupled Multilevel Systems in a Heat Bath 93 3.5 The Reduced Density Operator and the Reduced Density Matrix 96 3.5.1 The Reduced Density Operator 96 3.5.2 Equation of Motion for the Reduced Density Operator 97 3.5.3 Mean-field Approximation 98 3.5.4 The Interaction Representation of the Reduced Density Operator 99 3.5.5 The Nakajima–Zwanzig Equation 101 3.5.6 Second-order Equation of Motion for the Reduced Density Operator 105 3.6 Quantum Master Equation 107 3.6.1 Markov Approximation 109 3.7 The Reservoir Correlation Function 112 3.7.1 General Properties of C uv (t) 112 3.7.2 Harmonic Oscillator Reservoir 114 3.7.3 The Spectral Density 116 3.7.4 Linear Response Theory for the Reservoir 120 3.7.5 Classical Description of C uv (t) 122 3.8 Reduced Density Matrix in Energy Representation 123 3.8.1 The Quantum Master Equation in Energy Representation 123 3.8.2 Multilevel Redfield Equations 126 3.8.2.1 Population Transfer: a = b, c = d 127 3.8.2.2 Coherence Dephasing: a ≠ b, a = c, b = d 129 3.8.2.3 Remaining Elements of R ab,cd 129 3.8.3 The Secular Approximation 130 3.8.4 State Expansion of the System–Reservoir Coupling 131 3.8.4.1 Some Estimates 132 3.9 Coordinate and Wigner Representation of the Reduced Density Matrix 133 3.10 The Path Integral Representation of the Density Matrix 135 3.11 Hierarchy Equations of Motion Approach 140 3.12 Coherent to Dissipative Dynamics of a Two-level System 143 3.12.1 Coherent Dynamics 143 3.12.2 Dissipative Dynamics Using Eigenstates 144 3.12.3 Dissipative Dynamics Using Zeroth-order States 147 3.13 Trajectory-based Methods 149 3.13.1 The Mean-field Approach 149 3.13.2 The Surface Hopping Method 152 3.14 Generalized Rate Equations: The Liouville Space Approach 155 3.14.1 Projection Operator Technique 156 3.14.2 Generalized Rate Equations 157 3.14.3 Rate Equations 159 3.14.4 The Memory Kernels 159 3.14.5 Second-order Rate Expressions 161 3.14.6 Fourth-order Rate Expressions 164 3.14.6.1 Three-level System with Sequential Coupling 165 3.15 Supplement 168 3.15.1 Thermofield Dynamics 168 3.15.2 Stochastic Schrödinger Equation 172 References 175 Further Reading 176 4 Interaction of Molecular Systems with Radiation Fields 177 4.1 Introduction 178 4.2 Absorption of Light 182 4.2.1 Linear Absorption Coefficient 182 4.2.2 Dipole–Dipole Correlation Function 184 4.3 Nonlinear Optical Response 186 4.3.1 Nonlinear Polarization 186 4.3.2 Nonlinear Response Functions 189 4.3.3 Eigenstate Expansion of the Response Functions 191 4.3.4 Cumulant Expansion of the Response Functions 194 4.3.5 Rotating Wave Approximation 197 4.3.6 Pump–Probe Spectroscopy 198 4.3.7 Two-dimensional Spectroscopy 202 4.4 Field Quantization and Spontaneous Emission of Light 206 References 208 Further Reading 209 5 Vibrational Dynamics: Energy Redistribution, Relaxation, and Dephasing 211 5.1 Introduction 211 5.2 Intramolecular Vibrational Energy Redistribution 215 5.2.1 Zeroth-order Basis and State Mixing 215 5.2.2 Golden Rule and Beyond 219 5.3 Intermolecular Vibrational Energy Relaxation 223 5.3.1 The System–Reservoir Hamiltonian 223 5.3.2 Instantaneous Normal Modes 226 5.3.3 Generalized Langevin Equation 228 5.3.4 Classical Force–Force Correlation Functions 231 5.3.5 Dissipative Dynamics of a Harmonic Oscillator 234 5.4 Polyatomic Molecules in Solution 237 5.4.1 System–Reservoir Hamiltonian 237 5.4.2 Higher Order Multiquantum Relaxation 238 5.5 Quantum–Classical Approaches to Relaxation and Dephasing 243 References 247 Further Reading 247 6 Intramolecular Electronic Transitions 249 6.1 Introduction 249 6.1.1 Optical Transitions 250 6.1.2 Internal Conversion Processes 255 6.2 The Optical Absorption Coefficient 255 6.2.1 Golden Rule Formulation 255 6.2.2 The Density of States 258 6.2.3 Absorption Coefficient for Harmonic Potential Energy Surfaces 260 6.2.4 Absorption Lineshape and Spectral Density 263 6.2.5 Cumulant Expansion of the Absorption Coefficient 264 6.2.6 Absorption Coefficient for Model Spectral Densities 266 6.3 Absorption Coefficient and Dipole–Dipole Correlation Function 269 6.3.1 Absorption Coefficient and Wave Packet Propagation 269 6.3.2 Absorption Coefficient and Reduced Density Operator Propagation 273 6.3.3 Mixed Quantum–Classical Computation of the Absorption Coefficient 275 6.4 The Emission Spectrum 280 6.5 Optical Preparation of an Excited Electronic State 281 6.5.1 Wave Function Formulation 281 6.5.1.1 Case of Short Pulse Duration 284 6.5.1.2 Case of Long Pulse Duration 284 6.5.2 Density Matrix Formulation 284 6.6 Internal Conversion Dynamics 286 6.6.1 The Internal Conversion Rate 287 6.6.2 Ultrafast Internal Conversion 288 6.7 Supplement 290 6.7.1 Absorption Coefficient for Displaced Harmonic Oscillators 290 References 294 Further Reading 294 7 Electron Transfer 295 7.1 Classification of Electron Transfer Reactions 295 7.2 Theoretical Models for Electron Transfer Systems 305 7.2.1 The Electron Transfer Hamiltonian 305 7.2.2 The Electron–Vibrational Hamiltonian of a Donor–Acceptor Complex 310 7.2.2.1 The Spin-Boson Model 312 7.2.2.2 Two Independent Sets of Vibrational Coordinates 313 7.2.3 Electron–Vibrational State Representation of the Hamiltonian 314 7.3 Regimes of Electron Transfer 315 7.3.1 Landau–Zener Theory of Electron Transfer 319 7.4 Nonadiabatic Electron Transfer in a Donor–Acceptor Complex 323 7.4.1 High-temperature Case 323 7.4.2 High-temperature Case: Two Independent Sets of Vibrational Coordinates 327 7.4.3 Low-temperature Case: Nuclear Tunneling 330 7.4.4 The Mixed Quantum–Classical Case 333 7.4.5 Description of the Mixed Quantum–Classical Case by a Spectral Density 335 7.5 Bridge-Mediated Electron Transfer 336 7.5.1 The Superexchange Mechanism 338 7.5.2 Electron Transfer Through Arbitrary Large Bridges 340 7.5.2.1 Case of Small Intrabridge Transfer Integrals 340 7.5.2.2 Case of Large Intrabridge Transfer Integrals 341 7.6 Nonequilibrium Quantum Statistical Description of Electron Transfer 343 7.6.1 Unified Description of Electron Transfer in a Donor–Bridge–Acceptor System 344 7.6.2 Transition to the Adiabatic Electron Transfer 347 7.7 Heterogeneous Electron Transfer 347 7.7.1 Nonadiabatic Charge Injection into the Solid State Described in a Single-Electron Model 348 7.7.1.1 Low-temperature Case 351 7.7.1.2 High-temperature Case 352 7.7.1.3 HET-induced Lifetime 352 7.7.2 Ultrafast Photoinduced HET from a Molecule into a Semiconductor. A Case Study 354 7.7.3 Nonadiabatic Electron Transfer from the Solid State into the Molecule 355 7.8 Charge Transmission Through Single Molecules 356 7.8.1 Inelastic Charge Transmission 359 7.8.1.1 An Example 360 7.8.2 Elastic Charge Transmission 361 7.8.2.1 An Example 364 7.8.2.2 Inclusion of Vibrational Levels 365 7.9 Photoinduced Ultrafast Electron Transfer 367 7.9.1 Quantum Master Equation for Electron Transfer Reactions 372 7.9.2 Rate Expressions 377 7.10 Supplement 378 7.10.1 Landau–Zener Transition Amplitude 378 7.10.2 The Multimode Marcus Formula 379 7.10.3 Second-order Electron Transfer Rate 380 7.10.4 Fourth-order Donor–Acceptor Transition Rate 382 7.10.5 Rate of Elastic Charge Transmission Through a Single Molecule 385 References 387 Further Reading 388 8 Proton Transfer 389 8.1 Introduction 389 8.2 Proton Transfer Hamiltonian 395 8.2.1 Hydrogen Bonds 395 8.2.2 Reaction Surface Hamiltonian for Intramolecular Proton Transfer 399 8.2.3 Tunneling Splittings 400 8.2.4 The Proton Transfer Hamiltonian in the Condensed Phase 404 8.2.4.1 Adiabatic Representation 405 8.2.4.2 Diabatic Representation 406 8.3 Adiabatic Proton Transfer 407 8.4 Nonadiabatic Proton Transfer 410 8.5 The Intermediate Regime: From Quantum to Quantum–Classical Hybrid Methods 412 8.5.1 Multidimensional Wave Packet Dynamics 413 8.5.2 Surface Hopping 415 8.6 Proton-coupled Electron Transfer 417 References 419 Further Reading 419 9 Excitation Energy Transfer 421 9.1 Introduction 421 9.2 The Aggregate Hamiltonian 427 9.2.1 The Intermolecular Coulomb Interaction 430 9.2.1.1 Dipole–Dipole Coupling 432 9.2.2 The Two-level Model 433 9.2.2.1 Classification of the Coulomb Interactions 433 9.2.3 Single and Double Excitations of the Aggregate 436 9.2.3.1 The Ground State Matrix Element 438 9.2.3.2 The Single Excited State Matrix Elements 438 9.2.3.3 The Double Excited State Matrix Elements 439 9.2.3.4 Off-Diagonal Matrix Elements and Coupling to the Radiation Field 440 9.2.3.5 Neglect of Intermolecular Electrostatic Coupling 441 9.2.4 Introduction of Delocalized Exciton States 441 9.2.4.1 The Molecular Heterodimer 443 9.2.4.2 The Finite Molecular Chain and the Molecular Ring 443 9.3 Exciton–Vibrational Interaction 444 9.3.1 Exclusive Coupling to Intramolecular Vibrations 445 9.3.2 Coupling to Aggregate Normal Mode Vibrations 448 9.3.3 Differentiating Between Intramolecular and Reservoir Normal Mode Vibrations 449 9.3.4 Exciton–Vibrational Hamiltonian and Excitonic Potential Energy Surfaces 449 9.4 Regimes of Excitation Energy Transfer 450 9.4.1 Quantum Statistical Approaches to Excitation Energy Transfer 452 9.5 Transfer Dynamics in the Case of Weak Excitonic Coupling: Förster Theory 453 9.5.1 The Transfer Rate 454 9.5.2 The Förster Rate 456 9.5.3 Nonequilibrium Quantum Statistical Description of Förster Transfer 458 9.5.3.1 Case of Common Vibrational Coordinates 462 9.5.3.2 Case of Vibrational Modulation of the Excitonic Coupling 464 9.6 Transfer Dynamics in the Case of Strong Excitonic Coupling 465 9.6.1 Rate Equations for Exciton Dynamics 465 9.6.2 Density Matrix Equations for Exciton Dynamics 466 9.6.3 Site Representation 468 9.6.4 Excitation Energy Transfer Among Different Aggregates 471 9.6.5 Exciton Transfer in the Case of Strong Exciton–Vibrational Coupling 472 9.6.6 Nonperturbative and Non-Markovian Exciton Dynamics 475 9.7 Optical Properties of Aggregates 477 9.7.1 Case of No Exciton–Vibrational Coupling 479 9.7.1.1 Static Disorder 481 9.7.2 Inclusion of Exciton–Vibrational Coupling 484 9.7.2.1 The n-Particle Expansion 484 9.7.2.2 Weak Exciton–Vibrational Coupling 487 9.7.2.3 Strong Exciton–Vibrational Coupling 488 9.8 Excitation Energy Transfer Including Charge-transfer States 490 9.8.1 Excitation Energy Transfer Via Two-electron Exchange 490 9.8.2 Charge-transfer Excitons and Charge Separation 493 9.9 Exciton–Exciton Annihilation 496 9.9.1 Three-level Description of the Molecules in the Aggregate 498 9.9.2 The Rate of Exciton–Exciton Annihilation 499 9.10 Supplement 500 9.10.1 Second Quantization Notation of the Aggregate Hamiltonian 500 9.10.2 Photon-mediated Long-range Excitation Energy Transfer 501 9.10.2.1 Preparatory Considerations for the Rate Computation 503 9.10.2.2 Photon Correlation Functions 505 9.10.2.3 The Rate of Photon-mediated Excitation Energy Transfer 506 9.10.2.4 Some Estimates 508 9.10.3 Fourth-order Rate of Two-electron-transfer-assisted EET 509 References 513 Further Reading 514 Index 515
£123.25
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Chemical Technology: From Principles to Products
Book SynopsisA fully updated edition of a popular textbook covering the four disciplines of chemical technology?featuring new developments in the field Clear and thorough throughout, this textbook covers the major sub-disciplines of modern chemical technology?chemistry, thermal and mechanical unit operations, chemical reaction engineering, and general chemical technology?alongside raw materials, energy sources and detailed descriptions of 24 important industrial processes and products. It brings information on energy and raw material consumption and production data of chemicals up to date and offers not just improved and extended chapters, but completely new ones as well. This new edition of Chemical Technology: From Principles to Products features a new chapter illustrating the global economic map and its development from the 15th century until today, and another on energy consumption in human history. Chemical key technologies for a future sustainable energy system such as power-to-X and hydrogen storage are now also examined. Chapters on inorganic products, material reserves, and water consumption and resources have been extended, while another presents environmental aspects of plastic pollution and handling of plastic waste. The book also adds four important processes to its pages: production of titanium dioxide, silicon, production and chemical recycling of polytetrafluoroethylene, and fermentative synthesis of amino acids. -Provides comprehensive coverage of chemical technology?from the fundamentals to 24 of the most important processes -Intertwines the four disciplines of chemical technology: chemistry, thermal and mechanical unit operations, chemical reaction engineering and general chemical technology -Fully updated with new content on: power-to-X and hydrogen storage; inorganic products, including metals, glass, and ceramics; water consumption and pollution; and additional industrial processes -Written by authors with extensive experience in teaching the topic and helping students understand the complex concepts Chemical Technology: From Principles to Products, Second Edition is an ideal textbook for advanced students of chemical technology and will appeal to anyone in chemical engineering. Table of ContentsPreface of First Edition (and Guidelines How to Use This Textbook) xvii Why a Second Edition? xviii Notation xxi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 What is Chemical Technology? 1 1.2 The Chemical Industry 2 1.3 The Changing Global Economic Map 6 2 Chemical Aspects of Industrial Chemistry 19 2.1 Stability and Reactivity of Chemical Bonds 19 2.1.1 Factors that Influence the Electronic Nature of Bonds and Atoms 19 2.1.2 Steric Effects 20 2.1.3 Classification of Reagents 21 2.2 General Classification of Reactions 21 2.2.1 Acid–Base-Catalyzed Reactions 22 2.2.2 Reactions via Free Radicals 23 2.2.3 Nucleophilic Substitution Reactions 24 2.2.4 Reactions via Carbocations 24 2.2.5 Electrophilic Substitution Reactions at Aromatic Compounds 25 2.2.6 Electrophilic Addition Reactions 27 2.2.7 Nucleophilic Addition Reactions 27 2.2.8 Asymmetric Synthesis 28 2.3 Catalysis 30 2.3.1 Introduction and General Aspects 30 2.3.2 Homogeneous, Heterogeneous, and Biocatalysis 35 2.3.3 Production and Characterization of Heterogeneous Catalysts 38 2.3.4 Deactivation of Catalysts 41 2.3.5 Future Trends in Catalysis Research 43 3 Thermal and Mechanical Unit Operations 45 3.1 Properties of Gases and Liquids 46 3.1.1 Ideal and Real Gas 46 3.1.2 Heat Capacities and the Joule–Thomson Effect 50 3.1.3 Physical Transformations of Pure Substances: Vaporization and Melting 53 3.1.4 Transport Properties (Diffusivity, Viscosity, Heat Conduction) 58 3.2 Heat and Mass Transfer in Chemical Engineering 69 3.2.1 Heat Transport 69 3.2.2 Mass Transport 86 3.3 Thermal Unit Operations 93 3.3.1 Heat Exchangers (Recuperators and Regenerators) 94 3.3.2 Distillation 99 3.3.3 Absorption (Gas Scrubbing) 110 3.3.4 Liquid–Liquid Extraction 118 3.3.5 Adsorption 122 3.3.6 Fluid–Solid Extraction 136 3.3.7 Crystallization 139 3.3.8 Separation by Membranes 141 3.4 Mechanical Unit Operations 149 3.4.1 Conveyance of Fluids 149 3.4.2 Contacting and Mixing of Fluids 159 3.4.3 Crushing and Screening of Solids 160 3.4.4 Separation of Solids from Fluids 164 4 Chemical Reaction Engineering 171 4.1 Main Aspects and Basic Definitions of Chemical Reaction Engineering 171 4.1.1 Design Aspects and Scale-up Dimensions of Chemical Reactors 172 4.1.2 Speed of Chemical and Biochemical Reactions 172 4.1.3 Influence of Reactor Type on Productivity 174 4.1.4 Terms Used to Characterize the Composition of a Reaction Mixture 174 4.1.5 Terms Used to Quantify the Result of a Chemical Conversion 175 4.1.6 Reaction Time and Residence Time 175 4.1.7 Space Velocity and Space–Time Yield 176 4.2 Chemical Thermodynamics 177 4.2.1 Introduction and Perfect Gas Equilibria 177 4.2.2 Real Gas Equilibria 184 4.2.3 Equilibrium of Liquid–Liquid Reactions 186 4.2.4 Equilibrium of Gas–Solid Reactions 188 4.2.5 Calculation of Simultaneous Equilibria 190 4.3 Kinetics of Homogeneous Reactions 192 4.3.1 Rate Equation: Influence of Temperature and Reaction Order 192 4.3.2 Parallel Reactions and Reactions in Series 197 4.3.3 Reversible Reactions 200 4.3.4 Reactions with Varying Volume (for the Example of a Batch Reactor) 203 4.4 Kinetics of Fluid–Fluid Reactions 204 4.4.1 Mass Transfer at a Gas–Liquid Interface (Two-Film Theory) 205 4.4.2 Mass Transfer with (Slow) Homogeneous Reaction in the Bulk Phase 207 4.4.3 Mass Transfer with Fast or Instantaneous Reaction near or at the Interface 208 4.5 Kinetics of Heterogeneously Catalyzed Reactions 213 4.5.1 Spectrum of Factors Influencing the Rate of Heterogeneously Catalyzed Reactions 213 4.5.2 Chemical Reaction Rate: Surface Kinetics 217 4.5.3 Reaction on a Solid Catalyst and Interfacial Transport of Mass and Heat 222 4.5.4 Chemical Reaction and Internal Transport of Mass and Heat 232 4.5.5 Simultaneous Occurrence of Interfacial and InternalMass Transport Effects 240 4.5.6 Influence of External and Internal Mass Transfer on Selectivity 245 4.6 Kinetics of Gas–Solid Reactions 253 4.6.1 Spectrum of Factors Influencing the Rate of Gas–Solid Reactions 254 4.6.2 Reaction of a Gas with a Nonporous Solid 255 4.6.3 Reaction of a Gas with a Porous Solid 260 4.7 Criteria Used to Exclude Interphase and Intraparticle Mass and Heat Transport Limitations in Gas–Solid Reactions and Heterogeneously Catalyzed Reactions 265 4.7.1 External Mass Transfer Through Boundary Layer 265 4.7.2 External Heat Transfer 266 4.7.3 Internal Mass Transfer 266 4.7.4 Internal Heat Transfer 266 4.8 Kinetics of Homogeneously or Enzyme-catalyzed Reactions 269 4.8.1 Homogeneous and Enzyme Catalysis in a Single-Phase System 269 4.8.2 Homogeneous Two-Phase Catalysis 271 4.9 Kinetics of Gas–Liquid Reactions on Solid Catalysts 273 4.9.1 Introduction 273 4.9.2 High Concentration of Liquid Reactant B (or Pure B) and Slightly Soluble Gas 275 4.9.3 Low Concentration of Liquid Reactant B and Highly Soluble Gas and/or High Pressure 275 4.10 Chemical Reactors 276 4.10.1 Overview of Reactor Types and Their Characteristics 277 4.10.2 Ideal Isothermal Reactors 284 4.10.3 Non-isothermal Ideal Reactors and Criteria for Prevention of Thermal Runaway 294 4.10.4 Non-ideal Flow and Residence Time Distribution 310 4.10.5 Tanks-in-Series Model 313 4.10.6 Dispersion Model 315 4.10.7 Modeling of Fixed Bed Reactors 325 4.10.8 Novel Developments in Reactor Technology 336 4.11 Measurement and Evaluation of Kinetic Data 344 4.11.1 Principal Methods for Determining Kinetic Data 345 4.11.2 Evaluation of Kinetic Data (Reaction Orders, Rate Constants) 347 4.11.3 Laboratory-Scale Reactors for Kinetic Measurements 350 4.11.4 Transport Limitations in Experimental Catalytic Reactors 351 4.11.5 Case Studies for the Evaluation of Kinetic Data 356 5 Raw Materials, Products, Environmental Aspects, and Costs of Chemical Technology 371 5.1 Raw Materials of Industrial Organic Chemistry and Energy Sources 372 5.1.1 Energy Consumption, Reserves, and Resources of Fossil Fuels and Renewables 373 5.1.2 Composition of Fossil Fuels and Routes for the Production of Synthetic Fuels 403 5.1.3 Natural Gas and Other Technical Gases 403 5.1.4 Crude Oil and Refinery Products 410 5.1.5 Coal and Coal Products 418 5.1.6 Renewable Raw Materials 422 5.1.7 Energy Consumption in Human History 429 5.1.8 Power-to-X and Hydrogen Storage Technologies 434 5.2 Inorganic Products and Raw Materials 448 5.2.1 Nonmetallic Inorganic Materials 448 5.2.2 Metals 453 5.3 Organic Intermediates and Final Products 469 5.3.1 Alkanes and Syngas 469 5.3.2 Alkenes, Alkynes, and Aromatic Hydrocarbons 472 5.3.3 Organic Intermediates Functionalized with Oxygen, Nitrogen, or Halogens 479 5.3.4 Polymers 495 5.3.5 Detergents and Surfactants 503 5.3.6 Fine Chemicals 507 5.4 Environmental Aspects of Chemical Technology 512 5.4.1 Air Pollution 512 5.4.2 Water Consumption and Water Footprint 515 5.4.3 Plastic Production, Pollution, and Recycling of Plastic Waste 523 5.4.4 “Green Chemistry” and Quantifying the Environmental Impact of Chemical Processes 527 5.5 Production Costs of Fuels and Chemicals Manufacturing 530 5.5.1 Price of Chemical Products 530 5.5.2 Investment Costs 530 5.5.3 Variable Costs 532 5.5.4 Operating Costs (Fixed and Variable Costs) 533 6 Examples of Industrial Processes 537 6.1 Ammonia Synthesis 537 6.1.1 Historical Development of Haber–Bosch Process 537 6.1.2 Thermodynamics of Ammonia Synthesis 539 6.1.3 Kinetics and Mechanism of Ammonia Synthesis 540 6.1.4 Technical Ammonia Process and Synthesis Reactors 542 6.2 Syngas and Hydrogen 547 6.2.1 Options to Produce Syngas and Hydrogen (Overview) 547 6.2.2 Syngas from Solid Fuels (Coal, Biomass) 551 6.2.3 Syngas by Partial Oxidation of Heavy Oils 560 6.2.4 Syngas by Steam Reforming of Natural Gas 562 6.3 Sulfuric Acid 565 6.3.1 Reactions and Thermodynamics of Sulfuric Acid Production 565 6.3.2 Production of SO2 566 6.3.3 SO2 Conversion into SO3 567 6.3.4 Sulfuric Acid Process 572 6.4 Nitric Acid 573 6.4.1 Reactions and Thermodynamics of Nitric Acid Production 574 6.4.2 Kinetics of Catalytic Oxidation of Ammonia 576 6.4.3 NO Oxidation 587 6.4.4 Nitric Acid Processes 588 6.5 Coke and Steel 591 6.5.1 Steel Production (Overview) 591 6.5.2 Production of Blast Furnace Coke 593 6.5.3 Production of Pig Iron in a Blast Furnace 599 6.6 Basic Chemicals by Steam Cracking 609 6.6.1 General and Mechanistic Aspects 609 6.6.2 Factors that Influence the Product Distribution 612 6.6.3 Industrial Steam Cracker Process 613 6.6.4 Economic Aspects of the Steam Cracker Process 617 6.7 Liquid Fuels by Cracking of Heavy Oils 618 6.7.1 Thermal Cracking (Delayed Coking) 619 6.7.2 Fluid Catalytic Cracking (FCC Process) 622 6.8 Clean Liquid Fuels by Hydrotreating 625 6.8.1 History, Current Status, and Perspective of Hydrotreating 625 6.8.2 Thermodynamics and Kinetics of Hydrodesulfurization (HDS) 626 6.8.3 Hydrodesulfurization Process and Reaction Engineering Aspects 629 6.9 High-Octane Gasoline by Catalytic Reforming 633 6.9.1 Reactions and Thermodynamics of Catalytic Reforming 633 6.9.2 Reforming Catalyst 635 6.9.3 Process of Catalytic Reforming 635 6.9.4 Deactivation and Regeneration of a Reforming Catalyst 638 6.10 Refinery Alkylation 649 6.10.1 Reaction and Reaction Mechanism of Refinery Alkylation 649 6.10.2 Alkylation Feedstock and Products 651 6.10.3 Process Variables 651 6.10.4 Commercial Alkylation Processes 652 6.11 Fuels and Chemicals from Syngas: Methanol and Fischer–Tropsch Synthesis 657 6.11.1 Fischer–Tropsch Synthesis 658 6.11.2 Methanol Synthesis 676 6.12 Ethylene and Propylene Oxide 685 6.12.1 Commercial Production of Ethylene Oxide 685 6.12.2 Commercial Production of Propylene Oxide 689 6.13 Catalytic Oxidation of o-Xylene to Phthalic Acid Anhydride 694 6.13.1 Production and Use of Phthalic Anhydride (Overview) 694 6.13.2 Design and Simulation of a Multi-tubular Reactor for Oxidation of o-Xylene to PA 695 6.14 Hydroformylation (Oxosynthesis) 701 6.14.1 Industrial Relevance of Hydroformylation 701 6.14.2 Hydroformylation Catalysis 703 6.14.3 Current Hydroformylation Catalyst and Process Technologies 706 6.14.4 Advanced Catalyst Immobilization Technologies for Hydroformylation Catalysis 714 6.15 Acetic Acid 721 6.15.1 Acetic Acid Synthesis via Acetaldehyde Oxidation 722 6.15.2 Acetic Acid Synthesis via Butane or Naphtha Oxidation 723 6.15.3 Acetic Acid Synthesis via Methanol Carbonylation 724 6.15.4 Other Technologies for the Commercial Production of Acetic Acid 728 6.16 Ethylene Oligomerization Processes for Linear 1-Alkene Production 729 6.16.1 Industrial Relevance of 1-Olefins 729 6.16.2 Aluminum-Alkyl-Based “Aufbaureaktion” (Growth Reaction) 730 6.16.3 Nickel-Catalyzed Oligomerization: Shell Higher Olefin Process (SHOP) 733 6.16.4 Metallacycle Mechanism for Selective Ethylene Oligomerization 735 6.17 Production of Fine Chemicals (ExampleMenthol) 740 6.17.1 Menthol and Menthol Production (Overview) 740 6.17.2 Thermodynamics and Kinetics of Epimerization of Menthol Isomers 741 6.17.3 Influence of Mass Transfer on the Epimerization of Menthol Isomers 744 6.17.4 Epimerization of Menthol Isomers in Technical Reactors 748 6.18 Treatment of Exhaust Gases from Mobile and Stationary Sources 750 6.18.1 Automotive Emission Control 750 6.18.2 Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) of NOx from Flue Gas from Power Plants 756 6.19 Industrial Electrolysis 763 6.19.1 Electrochemical Kinetics and Thermodynamics 763 6.19.2 Chlorine and Sodium Hydroxide 768 6.19.3 Electrolysis of Water 773 6.19.4 Electrometallurgy (Purification of Metals by Electrorefining) 778 6.20 Polyethene Production 782 6.20.1 Polyethene Classification and Industrial Use 782 6.20.2 General Characteristics of PE Production Processes 783 6.20.3 Reaction Mechanism and Process Equipment for the Production of LDPE 784 6.20.4 Catalysts for the Production of HDPE and LLDPE 787 6.20.5 Production Processes for HDPE and LLDPE 789 6.20.6 PE Production Economics and Modern Developments in PE Production 792 6.21 Titanium Dioxide 793 6.21.1 Production and Use of Titanium Dioxide (Overview) 793 6.21.2 Sulfate Process for Production of Titanium Dioxide 793 6.21.3 Chloride Process for Production of Titanium Dioxide 795 6.22 Silicon 796 6.22.1 Production and Use of Silicon (Overview) 796 6.22.2 Carbothermic Reduction of Silica 797 6.22.3 Refining, Casting, and Crushing of Metallurgical Grade Silicon 798 6.22.4 Economics of the Metallurgical Grade Silicon Production 798 6.22.5 Production of Photovoltaic Grade Silicon by Purification of Metallurgical Grade Silicon 798 6.23 Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) 801 6.23.1 Production and Use of PTFE (Overview) 801 6.23.2 Process for Production of PTFE 802 6.23.3 Treatment of PTFE Waste 802 6.24 Production of Amino Acids by Fermentation 807 6.24.1 General Aspects 807 6.24.2 Overview of the Methods Applied for Industrial Amino Acid Production 807 6.24.3 Amino Acid Fermentation 810 References 815 Index 841
£999.99
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Textile-Based Energy Harvesting and Storage
Book SynopsisTextile-Based Energy Harvesting and Storage Devices for Wearable Electronics Discover state-of-the-art developments in textile-based wearable and stretchable electronics from leaders in the field In Textile-Based Energy Harvesting and Storage Devices for Wearable Electronics, renowned researchers Professor Xing Fan and his co-authors deliver an insightful and rigorous exploration of textile-based energy harvesting and storage systems. The book covers the principles of smart fibers and fabrics, as well as their fabrication methods. It introduces, in detail, several fiber- and fabric-based energy harvesting and storage devices, including photovoltaics, piezoelectrics, triboelectrics, supercapacitors, batteries, and sensing and self-powered electric fabrics. The authors also discuss expanded functions of smart fabrics, like stretchability, hydrophobicity, air permeability and color-changeability. The book includes sections on emerging electronic fibers and textiles, including stress-sensing, strain-sensing, and chemical-sensing textiles, as well as emerging self-powered electronic textiles. Textile-Based Energy Harvesting and Storage Devices for Wearable Electronics concludes with an in-depth treatment of upcoming challenges, opportunities, and commercialization requirements for electronic textiles, providing valuable insight into a highly lucrative new commercial sector. The book also offers: A thorough introduction to the evolution from classical functional fibers to intelligent fibers and textiles An exploration of typical film deposition technologies, like dry-process film deposition and wet-process technologies for roll-to-roll device fabrication Practical discussions of the fabrication process of intelligent fibers and textiles, including the synthesis of classical functional fibers and nano/micro assembly on fiber materials In-depth examinations of energy harvesting and energy storage fibers, including photovoltaic, piezoelectric, and supercapacitor fibers Perfect for materials scientists, engineering scientists, and sensor developers, Textile-Based Energy Harvesting and Storage Devices for Wearable Electronics is also an indispensable resource for electrical engineers and professionals in the sensor industry seeking a one-stop reference for fiber- and fabric-based energy harvesting and storage systems for wearable and stretchable power sources.Table of ContentsPreface xi 1 On the Basis of Fibers and Textiles 1 1.1 On the Basis of Fibers 2 1.1.1 Nature Fibers 2 1.1.2 Chemical Fibers 4 1.1.3 Classical Functional Fibers 7 1.2 On the Basis of Textiles 11 1.2.1 Traditional Textiles 12 1.2.2 Classical Functional Textiles 15 1.3 The Evolution from Classical Functional Fibers to Intelligent Fibers and Textiles 20 1.3.1 Shape Memory Fibers and Textiles 20 1.3.2 Intelligent Temperature-Regulating Fibers and Textiles 22 1.3.3 Intelligent Color-Changing Fibers and Textiles 24 1.3.4 Wearable Electronic Intelligent Fibers and Textiles 27 1.4 Conclusions 30 References 31 2 A Brief Introduction to Typical Film Deposition Technologies 33 2.1 Dry-Process Film Deposition Technologies 34 2.1.1 Physical Vapor Deposition for Film Deposition 34 2.1.2 Chemical Vapor Deposition for Film Deposition 37 2.1.3 Morphology and Pattern Design 41 2.2 Typical Wet-Process Technologies for Roll-to-Roll Device Fabrication 44 2.2.1 Chemical Reaction Coating for Thin Film Preparation 45 2.2.2 Electrochemical Reaction Method for Thin Film Preparation 49 2.2.3 Spray Pyrolysis 50 2.2.4 Langmuir–Blodgett Technique 51 2.3 Typical Film Structure Characterization Technologies 54 2.3.1 Thin Film Analysis Method: Crystal Structure Properties 54 2.3.2 Thin Film Analysis Method: Morphology Properties 58 2.3.3 Thin Film Analysis Method: Chemical Composition and Structure Properties 60 2.4 Conclusions 64 References 65 3 The Fabrication Process of Intelligent Fibers and Textiles 69 3.1 The Synthesis of Classical Functional Fibers 70 3.1.1 Wet Spinning 70 3.1.2 Electrospinning 71 3.1.3 Dry Spinning 74 3.1.4 Thermal Drawing Process 74 3.1.5 Surface Modification Method 76 3.2 The Nano/Micro-Assembly on Fiber Materials 79 3.2.1 Chemical Liquid Phase Deposition 79 3.2.2 Plasma Spraying Method 87 3.2.3 Chemical Vapor Deposition 88 3.2.4 Physical Vapor Deposition 90 3.3 Device Assembly from Fibers to Textiles 91 3.3.1 Direct Coating Based on Fabric 92 3.3.2 Layer Stacking of Fabric Electrodes 94 3.3.3 Interweaving of Fiber Electrodes 95 3.3.4 Weaving of Fiber Devices 97 3.3.5 Other Assembly Methods 97 References 100 4 Energy Harvesting Fibers 105 4.1 Photovoltaic Fibers 105 4.1.1 Fiber-Shaped Inorganic Solar Cell 106 4.1.2 Fiber-Shaped Organic Polymer Solar Cell 108 4.1.3 Fiber-Shaped Dye-Sensitized Solar Cell 113 4.1.4 Fiber-Shaped Perovskite Solar Cell 119 4.2 Piezoelectric Fibers 124 4.2.1 Working Principle of Piezoelectricity 124 4.2.2 Piezoelectric Materials 125 4.2.3 Fiber-Shaped Piezoelectric Devices Based on Piezoceramics 126 4.2.4 Fiber-Shaped Piezoelectric Devices Based on Piezopolymers 127 4.2.5 Fiber-Shaped Piezoelectric Devices Based on Piezocomposites 130 4.3 Triboelectric Fibers 132 4.3.1 Working Principle of Triboelectric Nanogenerator 132 4.3.2 Triboelectrification Materials 134 4.3.3 Triboelectric Fiber Devices 135 4.4 Thermoelectric Fibers 140 4.4.1 Introduction of Thermoelectric Effect 140 4.4.2 TE Materials for Wearable Thermoelectric Devices 141 4.4.3 Fiber-Shaped Thermoelectric Devices 145 4.5 Conclusions and Outlook 147 References 148 5 Energy Storage Fibers 157 5.1 Supercapacitor Fibers 157 5.1.1 Supercapacitor Fibers with Carbon-Based Capacitive Materials 159 5.1.2 Supercapacitor Fibers with Composited Capacitive Materials 166 5.2 Battery Fibers 169 5.2.1 Primary Battery Fibers 170 5.2.2 Lithium-Ion Battery Fibers 173 5.2.3 Lithium-Sulfur Battery Fibers 174 5.2.4 Metal-Air Battery Fibers 177 5.2.5 Other Battery Fibers 180 5.3 Phase-Transit Fibers 182 5.3.1 Phase-Transit Fibers Based on Hydrocarbons and Fatty Acids 184 5.3.2 Phase-Transit Fibers Based on Fatty Alcohols 187 5.3.3 Phase-Transit Fibers Based on Other Kinds of Phase-Transit Materials 190 5.4 Conclusions 192 References 193 6 Smart Energy Textiles 197 6.1 Energy Harvesting Textiles 198 6.1.1 Photovoltaic Energy Harvesting Textiles 198 6.1.2 Thermoelectric Energy Harvesting Textiles 203 6.1.3 Mechanical Energy Harvesting Textiles 205 6.2 Energy Storage Textiles 209 6.2.1 Supercapacitor Textiles 209 6.2.2 Primary Battery Textiles 212 6.2.3 Secondary Battery Textiles 213 6.3 Hybrid Energy Textiles 218 6.3.1 Multiple Energy Harvesting Hybrid Textiles 219 6.3.2 Harvesting-Storage Hybrid Energy Textiles 222 6.4 Commercialization Power Requirements of Smart Energy Textiles 224 References 225 7 Function Expansion of Smart Energy Fibers and Textiles 231 7.1 Stretchability of Smart Energy Fibers and Textiles 231 7.1.1 Stretchable Electrode Based on Elastic Conductive Materials 232 7.1.2 Stretchable Electrode Based Electrode Structural Designs 236 7.1.3 Assembling of Fiber-Type and Textile-Type Stretchable Devices 238 7.2 Hydrophobicity of Smart Energy Fibers and Textiles 240 7.2.1 The History of Conventional Hydrophobic Fabrics 240 7.2.2 The Development of Hydrophobic Coatings 241 7.2.3 Fabricating Technologies for Hydrophobic Smart Energy Fibers and Textiles 245 7.3 Endurability of Smart Energy Fibers and Textiles 247 7.3.1 Mechanical Stability of Smart Energy Fibers and Textiles 247 7.3.2 Chemical Stability of Smart Energy Fibers and Textiles 249 7.3.3 OtherWorking Stability Under Complicate Environment 251 7.4 Air Permeability of Smart Energy Fibers and Textiles 253 7.4.1 The Influence of Textile Materials on Air Permeability 253 7.4.2 The Influence of Textile Structure Design on Air Permeability 255 7.5 Color-Change Ability of Smart Energy Fibers and Textiles 258 7.5.1 Color-Changeable Materials 259 7.5.2 Color-Changeable Textiles 261 7.6 Conclusions 263 References 264 8 Emerging Electronic Fibers and Textiles 273 8.1 Stress Sensing Textiles 274 8.1.1 Piezoresistive Stress Sensing Textiles 274 8.1.2 Capacitive Stress Sensing Textiles 278 8.1.3 Other Stress Sensing Textiles 284 8.2 Strain Sensing Textiles 286 8.2.1 Piezoresistive Strain Sensing Textiles 286 8.2.2 Capacitive Strain Sensing Textiles 292 8.2.3 Triboelectricity Strain Sensing Textiles 296 8.3 Chemical Sensing Textiles 298 8.3.1 Ion Sensing Textiles 298 8.3.2 Humidity Sensing Textiles 301 8.3.3 Gas Sensing Textiles 301 8.4 Other Function Coupled Textiles 304 8.5 Conclusions and Outlook 306 References 306 9 Towards Self-Powered Electronic Textiles 313 9.1 Self-Powered Electronic Devices 313 9.1.1 Independent Self-Powered Electronic Devices 314 9.1.2 Integrated Self-Powered Electronic Devices 317 9.1.3 Other Types of Self-Powered Electronic Devices 320 9.2 Flexible Self-Powered Electronic Devices 321 9.2.1 Flexible Independent Self-Powered Electronic Devices 322 9.2.2 Flexible Integrated Self-Powered Electronic Devices 324 9.2.3 Other Types of Flexible Self-Powered Electronic Devices 327 9.3 Self-Powered Electronic Fibers 327 9.3.1 Fiber-Type and Textile-Type Independent Self-Powered Electronic Devices 329 9.3.2 Textile-Type Integrated Self-Powered Electronic Devices 331 9.4 Summary 335 References 336 10 The Future of Electronic Textiles 341 10.1 Commercialization Requirements Beyond Energy Efficiency 342 10.1.1 Energy Supply 343 10.1.2 Electronic Function Expansion 344 10.1.3 Mechanical Durability 344 10.1.4 Wearability 345 10.2 Challenges for Smart Electronic Textiles 345 10.2.1 Energy Efficiency 346 10.2.2 Diversity of Functions 347 10.2.3 Wearing Comfort 347 10.2.4 Fabrication Technology 349 10.3 A Prospective Discussion on Smart Electronic Textiles 351 References 355 Index 357
£117.26
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH DNA- and RNA-Based Computing Systems
Book SynopsisDiscover the science of biocomputing with this comprehensive and forward-looking new resource DNA- and RNA-Based Computing Systems delivers an authoritative overview of DNA- and RNA-based biocomputing systems that touches on cutting-edge advancements in computer science, biotechnology, nanotechnology, and materials science. Accomplished researcher, academic, and author Evgeny Katz offers readers an examination of the intersection of computational, chemical, materials, and engineering aspects of biomolecular information processing. A perfect companion to the recently published Enzyme-Based Computing by the same editor, the book is an authoritative reference for those who hope to better understand DNA- and RNA-based logic gates, multi-component logic networks, combinatorial calculators, and related computational systems that have recently been developed for use in biocomputing devices. DNA- and RNA-Based Computing Systems summarizes the latest research efforts in this rapidly evolving field and points to possible future research foci. Along with an examination of potential applications in biosensing and bioactuation, particularly in the field of biomedicine, the book also includes topics like: A thorough introduction to the fields of DNA and RNA computing, including DNA/enzyme circuits A description of DNA logic gates, switches and circuits, and how to program them An introduction to photonic logic using DNA and RNA The development and applications of DNA computing for use in databases and robotics Perfect for biochemists, biotechnologists, materials scientists, and bioengineers, DNA- and RNA-Based Computing Systems also belongs on the bookshelves of computer technologists and electrical engineers who seek to improve their understanding of biomolecular information processing. Senior undergraduate students and graduate students in biochemistry, materials science, and computer science will also benefit from this book.Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 DNA Computing: Origination,Motivation, and Goals -- Illustrated Introduction 1Evgeny Katz 1.1 Motivation and Applications 1 1.2 DNA- and RNA-Based Biocomputing Systems in Progress 3 1.3 DNA-Based Information Storage Systems 8 1.4 Short Conclusions and Comments on the Book 10 2 DNA Computing: Methodologies and Challenges 15Deepak Sharma and Manojkumar Ramteke 2.1 Introduction to DNA Computing Methodologies 15 2.2 Key Developments in DNA Computing 16 2.3 Challenges 26 3 DNA Computing and Circuits 31Chuan Zhang 3.1 FromTheory to DNA Implementations 31 3.2 Application-Specific DNA Circuits 35 4 Connecting DNA Logic Gates in Computational Circuits 45Dmitry M. Kolpashchikov and Aresenij J. Kalnin 4.1 DNA Logic Gates in the Context of Molecular Computation 45 4.2 Connecting Deoxyribozyme Logic Gates 46 4.3 Connecting Gates Based on DNA Strand Displacement 47 4.4 Logic Gates Connected Via DNA Four-Way Junction (4WJ) 50 4.5 Conclusion 53 5 Development of Logic Gate Nanodevices from Fluorogenic RNA Aptamers 57Trinity Jackson, Rachel Fitzgerald, Daniel K.Miller, and Emil F. Khisamutdinov 5.1 Nucleic Acid: The Material of Choice for Nanotechnology 57 5.2 RNA Aptamers are Modular and Programmable Biosensing Units 58 5.3 Construction of RNA Nanoparticles with Integrated Logic Gate Operations Using Light-Up Aptamers 64 5.4 Conclusion 70 6 ProgrammingMolecular Circuitry and Intracellular Computing with Framework Nucleic Acids 77Jiang Li and Chunhai Fan 6.1 Framework Nucleic Acids 77 6.2 A Toolbox for Biomolecular Engineering of Living Systems 80 6.3 Targeted Applications 85 6.4 Nucleic Acid Nanotechnology-Enabled Computing Kernel 86 6.5 I/O and Human-Computer Interfacing 89 6.6 Information Storage 90 6.7 Perspectives 91 6.8 Conclusion 95 6.8.1 Terminology 96 7 Engineering DNA Switches for DNA Computing Applications 105Dominic Lauzon, Guichi Zhu, and Alexis Vallée-Bélisle 7.1 Introduction 105 7.2 Selecting Recognition Element Based on Input 107 7.3 Engineering Switching Mechanisms 108 7.4 Engineering Logic Output Function Response 116 7.5 Optimizing Switch Response 117 7.6 Perspective 120 8 Fluorescent Signal Design in DNA Logic Circuits 125Dan Huang, Shu Yang, and Qianfan Yang 8.1 Basic Signal Generation Strategies Based on DNA Structures 126 8.2 Designs for Constructing Multi-output Signals 138 8.3 Summary and Outlook 147 9 Nontraditional Luminescent and Quenching Materials for Nucleic Acid-Based Molecular Photonic Logic 155Rehan Higgins,Melissa Massey, andW. Russ Algar 9.1 Introduction 155 9.2 DNA Molecular Photonic Logic Gates 156 9.3 Nontraditional Luminescent Materials 158 9.4 Semiconductor "Quantum Dot" Nanocrystals 159 9.5 Lanthanide-Based Materials 161 9.6 Gold Nanoparticles 166 9.7 Metal Nanoclusters 169 9.8 Carbon Nanomaterials 171 9.9 Conjugated Polymers 175 9.10 Conclusions and Perspective 177 10 Programming Spatiotemporal Patterns with DNA-Based Circuits 185Marc Van Der Hofstadt, Guillaume Gines, Jean-Christophe Galas, and André Estevez-Torres 10.1 Introduction 185 10.2 Experimental Implementation of DNA Analog Circuits 188 10.3 Time-Dependent Spatial Patterns 193 10.4 Steady-State Spatial Patterns 202 10.5 Conclusion and Perspectives 206 11 ComputingWithout Computing: DNA Version 213Vladik Kreinovich and Julio C. Urenda 11.1 Introduction 213 11.2 ComputingWithout Computing -- Quantum Version: A Brief Reminder 214 11.3 ComputingWithout Computing -- Version Involving Acausal Processes: A Reminder 215 11.4 ComputingWithout Computing -- DNA Version 217 11.5 DNA ComputingWithout Computing Is Somewhat Less Powerful than Traditional DNA Computing: A Proof 222 11.6 First Related Result: Security Is More Difficult to Achieve than Privacy 224 11.7 Second Related Result: Data Storage Is More Difficult than Data Transmission 226 12 DNA Computing: Versatile Logic Circuits and Innovative Bio-applications 231Daoqing Fan, ErkangWang, and Shaojun Dong 12.1 Definition, Logical Principle, and Classification of DNA Computing 231 12.2 Advanced Arithmetic DNA Logic Devices 232 12.3 Advanced Non-arithmetic DNA Logic Devices 235 12.4 Concatenated Logic Circuits 239 12.5 InnovativeMultifunctional DNA Logic Library 241 12.6 Intelligent Bio-applications 241 12.7 Prospects 244 13 Nucleic Acid-Based Computing in Living Cells Using Strand Displacement Processes 247Lukas Oesinghaus and Friedrich C. Simmel 13.1 Nucleic Acid Strand Displacement 247 13.2 Synthetic Riboregulators 251 13.3 Combining Strand Displacement and CRISPR Mechanisms 255 13.4 Computing Via Nucleic Acid Strand Displacement in Mammalian Cells 258 13.5 Outlook 260 14 Strand Displacement in DNA-Based Nanodevices and Logic 265Antoine Bader and Scott L. Cockroft 14.1 An Introduction to Strand Displacement Reactions 265 14.2 Dynamic Reconfiguration of Structural Devices 268 14.3 Stepped and Autonomous DNAWalkers 271 14.4 Early Breakthroughs in DNA Computing 274 14.5 DNA-Based Molecular Logic 279 14.6 Future Prospects for Strand Displacement-Based Devices 286 15 Development and Application of Catalytic DNA in Nanoscale Robotics 293David Arredondo, Matthew R. Lakin, Darko Stefanovic, andMilan N. Stojanovic 15.1 Introduction 293 15.2 Brief History of DNAzymes 293 15.3 Experimental Implementations 296 15.4 DNAzymeWalkers 298 15.5 StatisticalMechanics and Simulation 300 15.6 Conclusions 302 16 DNA Origami Transformers 307Reem Mokhtar, Tianqi Song, Daniel Fu, Shalin Shah, Xin Song,Ming Yang, and John Reif 16.1 Introduction 307 16.2 Design 312 16.3 Experimental Demonstrations 316 16.4 Applications 318 16.5 Conclusion 322 17 Nanopore Decoding for DNA Computing 327Hiroki Yasuga, Kan Shoji, and Ryuji Kawano 17.1 Introduction 327 17.2 Application of Nanopore Technology for Rapid and Label-Free Decoding 330 17.3 Application of Nanopore Decoding in Medical Diagnosis 335 17.4 Conclusions 339 18 An Overview of DNA-Based Digital Data Storage 345Xin Song, Shalin Shah, and John Reif 18.1 Introduction 345 18.2 Components of a DNA Storage System 346 18.3 Conclusions and Outlook 350 19 Interfacing Enzyme-Based and DNA-Based Computing Systems: FromSimple Boolean Logic to Sophisticated Reversible Logic Systems 353Evgeny Katz 19.1 Interfacing Enzyme-Based and DNA-Based Computing Systems is a Challenging Goal: Motivations and Approaches 353 19.2 Bioelectronic Interface Transducing Logically Processed Signals from an Enzymatic System to a DNA System 354 19.3 The Bioelectronic Interface Connecting Enzyme-Based Reversible Logic Gates and DNA-Based Reversible Logic Gates: Realization in a Flow Device 362 19.4 Enzyme-Based Fredkin Gate Processing Biomolecular Signals Prior to the Bioelectronic Interface 363 19.5 Reversible DNA-Based Feynman Gate Activated by Signals Produced by the Enzyme-Based Fredkin Gate 368 19.6 Conclusions and Perspectives 371 19.A Appendix 373 19.A.1 Oligonucleotides Used in the System Mimicking Feynman Gate 373 References 374 20 Conclusions and Perspectives: Further Research Directions and Possible Applications 379Evgeny Katz Index 383
£999.99
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Fluoropolymeric Membranes: Fundamentals, Fabrication and Applications
£103.50
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Biodegradable Polymers in the Circular Plastics
Book SynopsisBiodegradable Polymers in the Circular Plastics Economy A comprehensive overview of the burgeoning field of biodegradable plastics As the lasting impact of humanity’s reliance on plastics comes into focus, scholars have begun to seek out solutions to plastic litter. In Biodegradable Polymers in the Circular Plastics Economy, an accomplished team of researchers delivers a focused guide (1) to understand plastic degradation and its role in waste hierarchy besides recycling, and (2) to create and use biodegradable plastics where appropriate. Created preferably from renewable resources, these eco-friendly polymers provide an opportunity to create sustainable and lasting solutions to the growing plastic-driven pollution problem. The broad approach to this handbook allows the authors to cover all aspects of these emerging materials, ranging from the problems present in the current plastics cycle, to the differences in type, production, and chemistry available within these systems, to end-of-life via recycling or degradation, and to life-cycle assessments. It also delves into potential commercial and policy issues to be addressed to successfully deploy this technology. Readers will also find: A thorough introduction to biodegradable polymers, focusing not only on the scientific aspects, but also addressing the larger political, commercial, and consumer concerns Mechanisms of biodegradation and the environmental impact of persistent polymers An in-depth discussion of degradable/hydrolysable polyesters, polysaccharides, lignin-based polymers, and vitrimers Management of plastic waste and life cycle assessment of bio-based plastics Biodegradable Polymers in the Circular Plastics Economy is the perfect overview of this complicated but essential research field and will appeal to polymer chemists, environmental chemists, chemical engineers, and bioengineers in academia and industry. The book is intended as a step towards a circular plastics economy that relies heavily on degradable plastics to sustain it.Table of ContentsPreface xv 1 Biodegradable Polymers – A Tutorial for a Circular Plastics Economy 1Jean-Paul Lange, Michiel Dusselier, and Stefaan De Wildeman 1.1 Context 1 1.2 Plastics in the Environment – Biodegradation and Impact of Litter 4 1.3 Biodegradable Polymers 5 1.3.1 Polyesters 6 1.3.2 Polysaccharides 8 1.3.3 Lignin 9 1.3.4 Vitrimers – Recyclable Thermosets 9 1.4 Beyond Biodegradation 10 1.4.1 Recycling and End-of-Life 10 1.4.2 Lca 11 1.4.3 Implementing the “New Plastics Economy” 11 1.5 Conclusions and Outlook 12 References 15 2 Fundamentals of Polymer Biodegradation Mechanisms 17Ebin Joseph, Payman Tohidifar, Cara T. Sarver, Roderick I. Mackie, and ChristopherV.Rao 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Overall Scheme of Polymer Degradation 19 2.3 Biodegradation of Polysaccharides 20 2.3.1 Cellulose 20 2.3.2 Starch 22 2.4 Biodegradation of Polyamides 24 2.5 Biodegradation of Polyesters 24 2.5.1 Polylactic Acid 25 2.5.2 Poly(ε-caprolactone) 27 2.5.3 Polyhydroxyalkanoates 28 2.5.4 Polyethylene Terephthalate 29 2.6 Biodegradation of Hydrocarbons 36 2.6.1 Polyethylene 36 2.6.2 Polypropylene 38 2.6.3 Polystyrene 39 2.7 Biodegradation of Halogenated Polymers 40 2.7.1 Polyvinyl Chloride 41 2.7.2 Polytetrafluoroethylene 41 2.8 Biodegradation of Polyethers 41 2.8.1 Polyethylene Glycol 41 2.8.2 Polyurethane 42 2.9 Application of Biodegradation 43 2.10 Current Challenges and Future Prospects for Biodegradation of Plastics Wastes 44 2.a Detailed Mechanism of PET Hydrolysis 45 References 46 3 Plastic Pollution. The Role of (Bio)Degradable Plastics and Other Solutions 59Lei Tian, Robert-Jan van Putten, and Gert-Jan M. Gruter 3.1 Introduction and Problem Definition 59 3.2 Sources of Macroplastics and MNPs 61 3.2.1 Mismanagement of Waste 61 3.2.2 Accidental Release 64 3.2.3 MNPs in Products 64 3.2.4 Degradation of Outdoor Objects 64 3.2.5 Wear (Tires, Clothing) 65 3.2.6 Waste and Wastewater Management (Water/Wind) 66 3.3 Impacts of Macroplastics and MNPs 67 3.3.1 Ecological Impact of Macroplastics (Entanglement and Ingestion) 67 3.3.2 Economic Impact of Macroplastics 67 3.3.3 Ecological Impacts of MNPs 68 3.3.3.1 Aquatic Environment 68 3.3.3.2 Terrestrial Environment 69 3.3.3.3 Atmosphere 69 3.3.4 Threat to Human Health 70 3.3.4.1 MNPs in the Human Food Chain 70 3.3.4.2 Plastic-Related Contaminants 70 3.3.4.3 Other Contaminants 70 3.3.5 Socio-Economic Impacts of MNPs 71 3.4 Plastic Biodegradability 71 3.5 Solutions 72 3.5.1 Cleaning Up 72 3.5.2 Waste Mitigation 73 3.5.3 Material Design 73 3.5.4 Bringing It All Together 73 3.5.5 Policies and Legislation 76 3.6 Conclusions 77 References 78 4 Tutorial on Polymers – Manufacture, Properties, and Applications 83Gert-Jan M. Gruter and Jean-Paul Lange 4.1 Introduction 83 4.1.1 Today’s Petrochemical Industry 83 4.1.2 Today’s Bio-based Plastic Industry 85 4.1.3 Environmental and Climate Challenges 85 4.2 Production of Polymers 86 4.2.1 Addition Polymers 87 4.2.2 Condensation Polymers 88 4.2.3 Thermosets 90 4.2.4 Renewable Monomers 91 4.2.4.1 Oils-Based Monomers 91 4.2.4.2 Sugar-Based Monomers 92 4.2.4.3 Lignocellulose-Based Monomers 93 4.2.4.4 CO 2 -Based Monomers 95 4.3 Main Polymers Applications 95 4.3.1 Rigids 97 4.3.2 Films 98 4.3.3 Fibers 98 4.3.4 Foams 99 4.3.5 CASE (Coatings, Adhesives, Sealants, Elastomers) 100 4.3.6 Composites 102 4.4 End-of-Life and Biodegradation 103 4.4.1 Reuse and Recycling 103 4.4.2 Biodegradation 103 4.5 Conclusions 105 4.a Definitions: Biopolymer vs. Bio-based Polymer and Relation to Biodegradation 105 List of Polymers 107 References 108 5 Condensation Polyesters 113Jules Stouten and Katrien V. Bernaerts 5.1 Introduction 113 5.2 Preparative Methods 114 5.3 Biodegradation of Polyesters 116 5.3.1 Hydrolytic Degradation 117 5.3.2 Enzymatic Degradation 118 5.4 Aliphatic Polyesters 119 5.4.1 Poly(alkylene dicarboxylates) 119 5.4.2 Poly(hydroxy acids) 120 5.4.3 Cyclic Sugar-Based Monomers 121 5.5 Semi-aromatic Polyesters 122 5.5.1 Poly(butylene adipate terephthalate) (PBAT) 122 5.5.2 Furanoate Copolymers 124 5.6 Cross-linked Polyesters 127 5.6.1 Multifunctional Alcohols or Carboxylic Acids 127 5.6.2 Incorporation of Functional Monomers 129 5.6.3 Cross-linking of Native Polyesters 130 5.7 Applications for Biodegradable Condensation Polyesters 130 5.7.1 Biomedical Applications 131 5.7.2 Agricultural Applications 132 5.7.3 Packaging Material 132 5.8 Polyester Recycling 132 5.9 Concluding Remarks 134 References 135 6 Polyhydroxyalkanoates (PHAs) – Production, Properties, and Biodegradation 145Martin Koller and Anindya Mukherjee 6.1 Introduction 145 6.1.1 General Aspects of Biodegradation of Polymers 147 6.1.2 General Aspects of Microbial Synthesis of PHAs 148 6.1.3 Types and Properties of PHAs 150 6.2 Biosynthesis – Substrates and Strains 152 6.2.1 Principle Stoichiometry of PHA Biosynthesis 152 6.2.2 Biosynthesis of scl- and mcl-PHAs 154 6.2.3 Heterotrophic Feedstocks 155 6.2.4 Autotrophic Feedstocks 157 6.2.5 Syngas 158 6.2.6 Methane 158 6.2.7 Production Strains 160 6.3 Bioengineering: Bioreactor Design and Feeding Regime 163 6.3.1 Feeding Regime 163 6.3.2 Continuously Operated Bioreactors for Liquid Feed 164 6.3.3 Bioreactors for Gas Feed 166 6.3.4 Photo-reactors for CO 2 Feed 166 6.4 Downstream Processing for PHA Recovery 167 6.4.1 Classical Solvents 168 6.4.2 Halogen-Free Solvents 170 6.4.3 Supercritical Solvents 172 6.4.4 Recovery by Chemical and Mechanical Disintegration of Biomass 173 6.4.5 Biological PHA Recovery 175 6.5 End-of-Life Options: Recycling and Biodegradation of PHAs 176 6.5.1 Recycling 176 6.5.2 Incineration 178 6.5.3 Mechanistic Considerations of PHA Degradation 178 6.6 Biodegradation – Added Value for Selected Applications 181 6.6.1 Packaging 181 6.6.2 Hygiene/Care/Cosmetics 182 6.6.3 Medical – Drug Delivery 182 6.6.4 Other Applications 184 6.7 Conclusions 185 References 186 7 Ring-Opening Polymerization Strategies for Degradable Polyesters 205An Sofie Narmon, Liliana M. Jenisch, Louis M. Pitet, and Michiel Dusselier 7.1 Introduction 205 7.2 Ring-Opening Polymerization Mechanisms 207 7.2.1 Cationic Ring-Opening Polymerization 207 7.2.2 Anionic Ring-Opening Polymerization 209 7.2.3 Coordination–Insertion Ring-Opening Polymerization 210 7.2.4 Enzymatic Ring-Opening Polymerization 211 7.3 ROP-Based Polyesters 211 7.3.1 Lactones 211 7.3.2 Thermodynamics and Kinetics 212 7.3.3 Functionalization 214 7.3.3.1 ROP of Functional Lactones 215 7.3.3.2 Post-polymerization Functionalization 215 7.3.3.3 Grafting 216 7.3.4 Four-Membered Lactones 216 7.3.4.1 β-Butyrolactone 218 7.3.4.2 Acid-Substituted β-Lactones (β-Malolactonate) 218 7.3.4.3 Alkoxy-Substituted β-Lactones 219 7.3.4.4 Alkene-Substituted β-Lactones 220 7.3.5 Five-Membered Lactones 221 7.3.5.1 γ-Butyrolactone 221 7.3.5.2 α-Angelicalactone 223 7.3.5.3 α-Methylene-γ-Butyrolactone 223 7.3.5.4 Ether γ-Lactones 225 7.3.6 Six-Membered Lactones 227 7.3.6.1 δ-Valerolactone 227 7.3.6.2 Unsaturated δ-Lactones 227 7.3.6.3 Ester-Substituted δ-Lactones 228 7.3.6.4 Ether δ-Lactones 230 7.3.6.5 Dilactones 232 7.3.7 Seven-Membered Lactones 236 7.3.7.1 ε-Caprolactone 236 7.3.7.2 Substituted and Functionalized ε-Caprolactone 238 7.3.7.3 Ether-ε-Lactones 241 7.4 Relations Between ROP Polymers and Degradability 242 7.5 Conclusion 246 7.6 Outlook and Recommendations 249 References 252 8 Recent Developments in Biodegradable Cellulose-Based Plastics 273Karin Molenveld and Ted M. Slaghek 8.1 General Introduction 273 8.2 Cellulose 274 8.3 The Development of Cellulose Plastics 275 8.3.1 Cellulose Feedstock and Dissolving Pulp 276 8.3.2 Cellulose Derivatization 276 8.3.3 Cellulose Acetate and Cellulose Esters 277 8.3.4 Cellophane 279 8.3.5 Cellulose Fibers in Thermoplastic Formulations 280 8.4 Recent Developments in Thermoplastic Cellulose Derivatives 280 8.4.1 Characterization Methods for Lignocellulosic Biomass 281 8.4.2 Alternative Feedstocks for Dissolving Pulp and Production Routes 282 8.4.3 Ionic Liquids and Deep Eutectic Solvents for Cellulose Regeneration and Modification 283 8.4.4 New Derivatization Routes 284 8.4.5 Plasticizers 284 8.4.6 Mixed Cellulose Esters 285 8.4.7 Cellulose–Polymer Blends 286 8.4.8 (New) Properties and Processing Routes 287 8.4.9 New Applications 287 8.5 Biodegradation of Cellulose Derivatives 288 8.6 Conclusions 289 References 290 9 Ester Derivatives of Microbial Synthetic Polysaccharides 299Hakyong Lee, Hongyi Gan, Azusa Togo, Yuya Fukata, and Tadahisa Iwata 9.1 Introduction 299 9.1.1 Background of Bio-Based Plastics 299 9.1.2 Polysaccharides 300 9.2 Zero Birefringence Property of Pullulan Esters 302 9.3 Bio-Based Adhesives from Dextran (α-1,6-Glucan) 304 9.4 Films and Fibers from Paramylon and Curdlan (β-1,3-Glucan) Esters 306 9.5 Polymerization of α-1,3-Glucan and Films of α-1,3-Glucan Esters 310 9.6 High-Performance Polysaccharide-Branched Esters 312 9.6.1 Cellulose-Branched Esters [14] 312 9.6.2 β-1,3-Glucan (Curdlan) Branched Esters [15] 314 9.6.3 α-1,3-Glucan-Branched Esters [16] 315 9.7 Enzymatic Esterification of Polysaccharides 316 9.7.1 Enzymes as Biocatalysts 317 9.7.2 Reaction Mechanism 318 9.7.3 Factors Influencing Enzyme Activity 319 9.7.4 Strategies for Efficient Biocatalyst Processes 320 9.7.5 Development Trend and Prospects 320 9.8 Biodegradation of Polysaccharide Ester 322 9.9 Summary 322 References 322 10 Biodegradable Lignin-Based Plastics 329Yi-ru Chen and Simo Sarkanen 10.1 Lignocellulose Biorefineries 329 10.2 Macromolecular Lignin Configuration 331 10.3 Industrial Availability of Lignins 336 10.4 Compelling Traits in Physicochemical Behavior of Kraft Lignin Species 337 10.5 Kraft Lignin-Based Plastics 341 10.6 Tuning Strength and Production Cost of Plastics with High Kraft Lignin Contents 343 10.7 Ligninsulfonates (Lignosulfonates) 346 10.8 Laboratory Ball-Milled Lignins 348 10.9 Blend Configuration in Ball-Milled Lignin-Based Plastics Exemplifies the General Case 351 10.10 Lignin–Lignin Blends 355 10.11 Biodegradation of Kraft Lignin-Based Plastics 357 10.12 Alternative Formulations for Polymeric Materials Containing More than 50 wt% Lignin 359 10.13 Concluding Remarks 362 Acknowledgments 362 References 363 11 Design of Recyclable Thermosets 369Bryn D. Monnery, Apostolos Karanastasis, and Louis M. Pitet 11.1 Introduction 369 11.1.1 Polymers and Plastics 369 11.1.2 Handling of Plastic Waste 370 11.1.3 Chemical Nature of Plastics 370 11.2 Design of Recyclable Thermosetting Polymers 372 11.2.1 Recyclability by Triggered Degradation 374 11.2.2 Dissociative Covalent Adaptive Networks 374 11.2.3 Vitrimers (Associative CANs) 376 11.3 Examples of Vitrimers 380 11.4 Adaptable Cross-Linking of Conventional Polymers 383 11.5 Outlook and Summary 385 References 387 12 Managing Plastic Wastes 391Jean-Paul Lange 12.1 Introduction 391 12.2 Plastic Waste 391 12.3 Mechanical Recycling 393 12.4 Dissolution/Precipitation 394 12.5 Chemical Recycling 395 12.5.1 Depolymerization of Condensation Polymers 396 12.5.2 Melt Pyrolysis of Polyolefins 397 12.5.3 Alternative Pyrolysis Processes 398 12.6 Energy Recovery – Recycle Fuels and Incineration 400 12.7 Waste Destruction – Biodegradation 401 12.8 Life Cycle Analyses 401 12.9 Need for Fresh Carbon Input 402 12.10 Conclusion and Outlook 403 References 404 13 Life Cycle Assessment of Bio-Based Plastics: Concepts, Findings, and Pitfalls 409li Shen 13.1 Introduction and Chapter Learning Objectives 409 13.2 “Bioplastics” Is a Confusing Term 409 13.3 LCA in a Nutshell 412 13.3.1 Concept and a Brief History 412 13.3.2 Procedure, Jargons, and Sciences Behind 413 13.3.2.1 Goal and Scope Definition 414 13.3.2.2 Life Cycle Inventory Analysis (LCI) 414 13.3.2.3 Life Cycle Impact Assessment (LCIA) 415 13.3.2.4 Interpretation 416 13.4 LCA Case Studies of Seven Single-Use Plastic Items Made from Bio-Based Resources: Highlights and Lessons Learned 417 13.4.1 Background, Aim, and Scope of the BIO-SPRI Study 417 13.4.2 Key Findings 419 13.4.2.1 Biomass Feedstock Acquisition 421 13.4.2.2 Manufacturing Phase: From Biomass to Polymers, Materials, and End Products 426 13.4.2.3 Distribution to End User: Impacts from Transportation 427 13.4.2.4 End-of-Life (EoL) Post-consumer Waste Management Scenarios 427 13.4.3 Comparisons with Petrochemical Plastics 431 13.5 Lessons Learned from the Case Studies and Looking Forward to a Circular Bio-Based Economy 432 13.a General Structure of Classification and Characterization in LCIA, using the example of 16 Impact Categories Recommended by the EC EF (Environmental Footprint) Impact Assessment Methods 434 13.b Normalization and Weighting Factors Recommended by the EF (Environmental Footprint) Method [12, 19, 46], Latest Update: May 2020 436 References 436 14 How to Create “A New Plastics Economy”? Marketing Strategies and Hurdles – Finding Application Niches 441Sil Nevejans and Stefaan De Wildeman 14.1 Introduction 441 14.2 Stories from the Past 442 14.2.1 Polyhydroxyalkanoates (PHAs) 442 14.2.2 Polylactic Acids (PLA) 443 14.2.3 Polyethylenefuranoates (PEF) 444 14.3 Greenwashing vs. Growing Pains 444 14.4 From Idea to Product: “Technical Readiness Levels” 445 14.4.1 Defining the Technical Readiness Levels 445 14.4.2 Application of the TRLs 447 14.4.3 Product(ion) Validation 449 14.5 Five Innovation Rules to Create “A New Plastics Economy” 449 14.5.1 Target Small-Volume, High-Value Applications to Open New Market Space 450 14.5.2 Time Right Instead of Fast 451 14.5.3 Go Local 452 14.5.4 Take Risks 453 14.5.5 Go “Green” 454 14.6 Conclusion 455 References 456 Index 457
£999.99
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Molecular Photoswitches: Chemistry, Properties,
Book SynopsisA comprehensive overview about the emerging field of photoswitches and their applications in materials science and biology Molecular Photoswitches guides the reader through the basic molecular structures of photochromic compounds and their applications in the area of photoresponsive materials as well as in the biological context. The initial chapters describe individual classes of molecular photoswitches, introducing their principles of photochromism, typical switching wavelengths, thermal stability of photoisomers and other key information, which is ordinarily spread in the literature. These classes comprise i.a. azobenzenes, diazocines, arylazoheterocycles, arylhydrazones, indigoids, photochromic imines, or acylhydrazones. The book also covers: Catalysis with molecular switches Applications in photochromic porous materials, liquid crystals, or nanoparticles Light-responsive molecular machines, logic devices, and molecular magnets Photomodulation of biological systems: photoswitchable biopolymers, lightmodulated antibiotics, cytotoxins, ion channel inhibitors, light-propelled artificial muscles, and computationally designed photochromic proteins This two-volume work is a valuable guide for researchers and non-experts working in the field of photochemistry, organic chemistry, catalysis, materials science, biology, and medicine.Table of ContentsEditorial Introduction SECTION I. Chemical Classes of Molecular Photoswitches Azobenzenes: The Quest for Visible Light Triggering Diazocines - Bridged Azobenzenes with Unusual Properties Arylazoheterocycles Arylhydrazones Spiropyrans - Molecular with Multiple Facets Diarylethenes - Molecules with Good Memory Fulgides and Fulgimides Stilbenes and Molecular Machines Overcrowded Alkenes and Chirochromism Indigoids Donor-Acceptor Stenhouse Adducts Photochromic Imines Acylhydrazones Norbornadiene/Quadricyclane (NBD/QC) and Conversion of Solar Energy Dihydroazulene/Vinylheptafulvene (DHA/VHF) and Molecular Electronics SECTION II. Applications of Molecular Photoswitches for Materials Sciences Switchable Molecular Magnets Superresolution Microscopy with Photoswitchable Fluorophores Catalysis with Molecular Switches Molecular Switches in Confined Spaces and on Nanoparticles Switchable Soft Materials Making and Breaking Bonds with Light in Crystals SECTION III. Photomodulation of Biological Systems Photopharmacology Restoring Vision - Ion Channels and Switches Photochromic Oligonucleotides Photochromic Peptides and Proteins Photochromic Lipids Computational Design of Photochromic Proteins
£999.99
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Graphdiyne: Fundamentals and Applications in
Book SynopsisGraphdiyne Discover the most cutting-edge developments in the study of graphdiyne from a pioneer of the field In Graphdiyne: Fundamentals and Applications in Renewable Energy and Electronics, accomplished chemist Dr. Yuliang Li delivers a practical and insightful compilation of theoretical and experimental developments in the study of graphdiyne. Of interest to both academics and industrial researchers in the fields of nanoscience, organic chemistry, carbon science, and renewable energies, the book systematically summarizes recent research into the exciting new material. Discover information about the properties of graphdiyne through theoretical simulations and experimental characterizations, as well as the development of graphdiyne with appropriate preparation technology. Learn to create new graphdiyne-based materials and better understand its intrinsic properties. Find out about synthetic methodologies, the controlled growth of aggregated state structures, and structural characterization. In addition to demonstrating the interdisciplinary potential and relevance of graphdiyne, the book also offers readers: A thorough introduction to basic structure and band gap engineering, including molecular and electronic structure, mechanical properties, and the layers structure of bulk graphdiyne Explorations of Graphdiyne synthesis and characterization, including films, nanotube arrays and nanowires, nanowalls, and nanosheets, as well as characterization methods Discussions of the functionalization of graphdiyne, including heteroatom doping, metal decoration, and absorption of guest molecules Rigorous treatments of Graphdiyne-based materials in catalytic applications, including photo- and electrocatalysts Perfect for organic chemists, electronics engineers, materials scientists, and physicists, Graphdiyne: Fundamentals and Applications in Renewable Energy and Electronics will also find its place on the bookshelves of surface and solid-state chemists, electrochemists, and catalytic chemists seeking a one-stop reference on this rising-star carbon material.Table of ContentsPreface xi 1 Introduction 1 Yongjun Li and Yuliang Li 1.1 The Development of Carbon Materials 1 1.2 Models and Nomenclature 3 1.3 Brief Introduction of Graphdiyne 7 References 8 2 Basic Structure and Band Gap Engineering: Theoretical Study of GDYs 13 Feng He 2.1 Structures 13 2.1.1 Theoretical Prediction and Classification 13 2.1.2 Geometric Structures of GDYs 16 2.2 Electronic Structures 18 2.2.1 Dirac Cones in α-, β-, and 6,6,12-Graphynes 18 2.2.2 Semiconductor Properties of γ-Graphynes 20 2.2.3 Electronic Structures Comparison of GDYs 22 2.2.4 Structure and Size-Based Electronic Properties 24 2.2.5 Strain-Dependent Electronic Properties 29 2.3 Mechanical Properties 32 2.3.1 Mechanical Properties of GDYs 32 2.3.2 Mechanical Properties of γ-Graphyne 34 2.3.3 Mechanical Properties of γ-Graphdiyne 37 2.3.4 Mechanical Properties of γ-Graphynes Family 40 2.3.5 The Influence Factors on the Mechanical Properties of GDYs 43 2.4 Layers Structure of Bulk GDYs 46 2.4.1 Stacking Modes for Bilayer α-Graphyne 46 2.4.2 Stacking Modes for Bilayer γ-Graphyne 48 2.4.3 Stacking Modes for Bilayer γ-Graphdiyne 50 2.4.4 Identification on the Stacking Structures of GDY 51 2.5 Band Gap Engineering of GDYs 54 2.5.1 Influences of Nonmetal Doping 54 2.5.2 Influences of Chemical Modification and Functionalization 58 2.5.3 Tunable Band Gap Under Strain 64 2.5.4 Graphyne Nanoribbons under Strain or Electric Field 69 References 71 3 GDY Synthesis and Characterization 79 Yingjie Zhao, Qingyan Pan, and Hui Liu 3.1 Synthesis 79 3.1.1 Basic Chemistry 79 3.1.2 Cu-Surface-Mediated Synthesis 81 3.1.3 Template Synthesis 94 3.1.4 Interfacial Synthesis 103 3.1.5 Vapor–Liquid–Solid (VLS) Growth 103 3.1.6 Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD) Growth 106 3.1.7 Explosion Approach 107 3.2 Characterization 108 3.2.1 Raman Spectroscopy 108 3.2.2 X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) 111 3.2.3 X-ray Absorption Spectroscopy (XAS) 111 3.2.4 Microscope Technology 113 3.2.5 X-ray Diffraction (XRD) Technique 115 3.2.6 Others 115 3.3 Summary 117 References 118 4 Functionalization of GDYs 125 Changshui Huang and Ning Wang 4.1 Heteroatom Doping 125 4.1.1 Nitrogen and Phosphor Doping 126 4.1.2 Halogen Doping 134 4.1.3 Sulfur, Boron, Hydrogen, and Other Nonmetal Heteroatoms 138 4.1.4 Dual Heteroatom Doping 145 4.2 Metal Decoration 146 4.2.1 Metal Atomic Decoration 146 4.2.2 Metallic Compounds 150 4.3 Absorption of Guest Molecules 153 References 156 5 Graphdiyne-Based Materials in Catalytic Applications 165 Yurui Xue and Yuliang Li 5.1 Graphdiyne-Based Zero-Valent Metal Atomic Catalysts 166 5.1.1 Synthetic Strategy for GDY-Based ACs 166 5.1.2 Adsorption Geometry and Electronic Structures of GDY-Based ACs 168 5.1.3 Morphology and Valence States of GDY-Based ACs 168 5.1.4 Application of GDY-Based ACs 174 5.1.4.1 Applied for Water Splitting 174 5.1.4.2 Applied for Ammonia Synthesis at Ambient Conditions 176 5.1.4.3 Applied for Oxygen Reduction Reaction 180 5.1.4.4 Applied for Organic Reactions 180 5.2 GDY-Based Heterojunction Catalysts 182 5.2.1 Hydrogen Evolution Reaction on GDY-Based Heteros 184 5.2.2 Oxygen Evolution Reaction on GDY-Based Heterojunction 192 5.2.3 Photo-/Photoelectrocatalytic Oxygen Evolution Reaction 197 5.2.4 Applied for Overall Water Splitting 200 5.2.5 Applied for Other Catalysis 203 5.3 Graphdiyne-Based Metal-Free Catalysts 206 5.3.1 Applied for Water Splitting 206 5.3.2 Applied for Oxygen Reduction Reactions 208 5.3.3 Applied for Photocatalysis 211 References 214 6 Graphdiyne-Based Materials in Rechargeable Batteries Applications 221 Zicheng Zuo and Yuliang Li 6.1 Introduction 221 6.2 Lithium-Ion Battery Anodes 224 6.3 Graphdiyne Derivatives for LIB Anodes 235 6.4 Sodium Ion Battery Anodes 243 6.5 Electrochemical Interface 245 6.5.1 Function of Interface 245 6.5.2 Protection for LIBs Anodes 248 6.5.3 Protection for LIB Cathodes 253 6.6 Lithium–Sulfur Battery 259 6.7 Lithium Metal Anodes 262 6.8 Supercapacitor Electrodes 267 6.9 Fuel Cells 270 References 277 7 Graphdiyne-Based Materials in Solar Cells Applications 287 Tonggang Jiu and Chengjie Zhao 7.1 Perovskite Solar Cells 289 7.1.1 Graphdiyne-Based Materials in Interfacial Layers 289 7.1.2 Graphdiyne-Based Materials in Active Layers 296 7.2 Organic Solar Cells 304 7.3 Others 309 7.3.1 Quantum Dots Solar Cells 309 7.3.2 Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells 311 7.4 Future Perspectives 312 References 312 8 Graphdiyne: Electronics, Thermoelectrics, and Magnetism Applications 315 Jialiang Xu and Xiaodong Qian 8.1 Electronic Devices 315 8.2 Optic Devices 322 8.3 Thermoelectric Materials 331 8.4 Magnetism 332 References 336 9 Graphdiyne-Based Materials in Sensors and Separation Applications 341 Yanbing Guo, Chuanqi Pan, and Yuhua Zhu 9.1 Sensors 341 9.1.1 Biomolecules Sensor 341 9.1.1.1 DNA Detection 341 9.1.1.2 RNA and Amino Acids Detection 344 9.1.2 Small-Molecule Detection Sensor 346 9.1.2.1 Gas Sensor 346 9.1.2.2 Humidity Detection 350 9.1.2.3 Hydrogen Peroxide Detection 350 9.1.2.4 Glucose Detection 350 9.1.3 Other Sensors 352 9.2 Separation 352 9.2.1 Gas Separation 352 9.2.1.1 Hydrogen Separation 352 9.2.1.2 Oxygen Separation 354 9.2.1.3 Carbon Dioxide Separation 356 9.2.1.4 Helium Separation 356 9.2.2 Oil/Water Separation 358 9.3 Conclusion and Perspective 360 References 361 10 Perspectives 367 Yuliang Li 10.1 Chemical Synthesis Methodology and Aggregate Structures of Graphdiyne 369 10.2 Controllable Preparation of Highly Ordered Graphdiyne 370 10.3 Fundamental Physical Properties and Applications of Graphdiyne 371 Index 373
£999.99
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Biorefinery of Oil Producing Plants for
Book SynopsisBiorefinery of Oil Producing Plants for Value-Added Products An instructive and up-to-date pretreatment and industrial applications of oil producing plants Biorefinery of Oil Producing Plants for Value-Added Products is a two-volume set that delivers a comprehensive exploration of oil producing plants, from their availability to their pretreatment, bioenergy generation, chemical generation, bioproduct generation, and economic impact. The distinguished team of editors has included a wide variety of highly instructive resources written by leading contributors to the field. This set explores the current and future potential of bioenergy production to address the energy and climate crisis, as well as the technologies used to produce materials like biogas, biodiesel, bioethanol, biobutanol, biochar, fuel pellets, and biohydrogen. It also discusses the production of biobased chemicals, including bio-oil, biosurfactants, catanionic surfactants, glycerol, biovanillin, bioplastic, and plant-oil based polyurethanes. Concluding with an insightful analysis of the economic effects of oil producing plants, the set also offers readers: A thorough introduction to the availability of oil producing plants, including palm oil, castor oil, jatropha, nyamplung, and coconut A comprehensive exploration of the pretreatment of oil producing plants, including the physical, chemical and biological pretreatment of lignocellulosic biomass Practical discussion of the generation of bioenergy, including biogas generation in the palm oil mill and biodiesel production techniques using jatropha In-depth examinations of the generation of biobased chemicals, including those produced from the tobacco plant Perfect for researchers and industry practitioners involved with the biorefinery of oil producing plants, Biorefinery of Oil Producing Plants for Value-Added Products also belongs in the libraries of undergraduate and graduate students studying agriculture, chemistry, engineering, and microbiology.Table of ContentsVolume 1 Preface xvii About the Editors xix 1 A Glance On Oil Producing Plants, Pretreatment and Bioenergy Production Using Oil Producing Plant 1 Suraini Abd-Aziz and Misri Gozan References 9 Part I Availability of Oil Producing Plants 11 2 Demand and Sustainability of Palm Oil Plantation 13 Suraini Abd-Aziz, Misri Gozan, Mohamad Faizal Ibrahim, and Lai-Yee Phang 2.1 Introduction 13 2.2 Production and Consumption of Global Palm Oil Industry 14 2.3 Major Hindrances in Sustainability Considerations 17 2.3.1 Environmental Issues 18 2.3.2 Socioeconomic Issues 19 2.4 Future Sustainability Implications of the World Largest Palm Oil Producers 20 2.4.1 Indonesia 21 2.4.2 Malaysia 22 2.5 Sustainable Versus Unsustainable Palm Oil Toward Carbon Neutral Emissions 23 2.6 Conclusions 24 References 25 3 Planting and Harvesting Jatropha 29 Penjit Srinophakun, Anna Saimaneerat, and Vipa Hongtrakul 3.1 Introduction 29 3.2 KUBP 78-9 and KUBP 202 Varieties 30 3.2.1 Plant Spacing 31 3.2.2 Plantation Layout and Data Collection 31 3.2.3 Fertilizer Application 33 3.2.4 Cutting Management 35 3.2.5 Weed Control 35 3.2.6 Insect, Pest, and Disease Control 37 3.3 Jatropha Performance 38 3.3.1 Plant Height and Canopy Width 38 3.3.2 First Flowering Day 40 3.3.3 Rainfall 41 3.3.4 Harvesting 43 3.3.5 Seed Yield and Weight of 100-Seed 45 3.4 Conclusions 47 Acknowledgments 47 References 47 4 Castor Oil (Ricinus communis) 51 Is Fatimah, Suresh Sagadevan, Baranya Murugan, and Oki Muraza 4.1 Source and Cultivation of the Castor Plant 51 4.2 Castor Oil Production 54 4.2.1 Cultivating and Harvesting Ricinus communis 54 4.2.2 Extraction of Castor Oil 57 4.2.3 Refining of Castor Oil 59 4.2.4 Standardization of Castor Oil 60 4.3 Castor Oil Products 60 4.3.1 Hydrogenated Castor Oil 60 4.3.2 Biodiesel from Castor Oil 61 4.3.3 Polymer from Castor Oil 67 4.3.4 Plasticizer from Castor Oil 67 4.3.5 Biolubricant from Castor Oil 69 4.3.6 Pharmaceutical Solvent from Castor Oil 72 4.4 Conclusions 73 References 73 5 Nyamplung (Calophyllum inophyllum) Oil 79 Nurul Sabrena Hanafi, Misri Gozan, and Suraini Abd-Aziz 5.1 Introduction 79 5.2 Nyamplung (Calophyllum inophyllum) 80 5.2.1 Characteristic of Nyamplung Seed Oil 81 5.2.2 Extraction of Nyamplung Seed Oil 82 5.2.2.1 Mechanical Extraction 83 5.2.2.2 Solvent Oil Extraction (Chemical Extraction) 83 5.2.3 Applications of Nyamplung Seed Oil 83 5.2.3.1 Medicinal Purposes 84 5.2.3.2 Cosmetic Ingredient 84 5.2.3.3 Biodiesel 85 5.3 Potential of Nyamplung Seed Oil as Biolubricant 86 5.3.1 Reactions Involved in Biolubricants Manufacturing 86 5.3.1.1 Transesterification 86 5.3.1.2 Epoxidation 87 5.3.2 Emerging Area of Biolubricant Industries Using Alternative Oil/Seed Oil 88 5.3.2.1 Applications of Biolubricant 89 5.3.2.2 Chemical Modification of Biolubricant 89 5.4 Conclusions 91 References 92 6 Coconut Oil 99 Muhammad A. Darmawan, Kiman Siregar, and Misri Gozan 6.1 Introduction 99 6.2 Extraction Process of Coconut Oil 100 6.2.1 Dry Extraction Process 100 6.2.1.1 Coconut Testa Oil 102 6.2.1.2 Copra Oil 102 6.2.2 Coconut Refining Process 102 6.2.2.1 Chemical Refining Process 102 6.2.2.2 Physical Refining Process 103 6.2.3 Wet Extraction Process 103 6.2.3.1 Heat and Cold Extraction of Virgin Coconut Oil 103 6.2.3.2 Fermentation and Enzymatic Process of Virgin Coconut Oil 104 6.3 Physicochemical and Chemical Compositions of Coconut Oil 105 6.4 The Properties of Coconut Fruit 108 6.5 Health Benefits of Virgin Coconut Oil 111 6.5.1 Virgin Coconut Oil Effects on Artery Disease 111 6.5.2 Antioxidant Activity of Virgin Coconut Oil 111 6.5.3 Antidiabetic Activity of Virgin Coconut Oil 112 6.5.4 Antimicrobial Activity of Virgin Coconut Oil 112 6.6 Coconut Oil as Fuel 112 6.7 Coconut Oil as Cooking Oil 113 6.8 Productivity and Problems in Coconut Plantation 114 6.8.1 Productivity of Coconut Plantation in Indonesia 114 6.8.2 Problems of Coconut Plantation and Industry in Indonesia 115 6.9 Conclusions 116 References 116 Part II Pretreatment 123 7 Efficient Physical and Chemical Pretreatment of Lignocellulosic Biomass 125 Liping Tan, Jian Zhao, and Yinbo Qu 7.1 Introduction 125 7.2 Type of Physical and Chemical Pretreatment 126 7.2.1 Bisulfite Pretreatment 126 7.2.2 Formiline Pretreatment 128 7.2.3 Hydrothermal Pretreatment 128 7.2.4 Deep Eutectic Solvents (DES) Pretreatment 129 7.2.5 Comparison of Physical and Chemical Pretreatment Methods 130 7.2.6 Combinations of Physical and Chemical Pretreatment 133 7.3 Conclusions 135 Acknowledgment 135 References 135 8 Ionic Solution Pretreatment of Lignocellulosic Biomass 141 Chien-Yuan Su, Wei-Chun Hung, Chiung-Fang Liu, Bo-Jhih Lin, and Hou-Peng Wan 8.1 Overview of Biomass Hydrolysis 141 8.1.1 Acid Hydrolysis 143 8.1.2 Ionic Liquid Hydrolysis 144 8.1.2.1 Development and Principle of Ionic Liquid Hydrolysis 144 8.1.2.2 Ionic Solution Hydrolysis 145 8.2 Case Study of Ionic Solution Hydrolysis 147 8.2.1 Feedstock Analysis and Dissolution Efficiency 147 8.2.2 Sugar Yields from Various Biomass via Ionic Solution Hydrolysis 150 8.2.3 Purification of Hydrolysis Products 151 8.2.3.1 Liquid–Liquid Extraction 151 8.2.3.2 Reactive Distillation 151 8.2.3.3 Ion Exclusion Chromatography and Membrane Filtration 153 8.2.4 Comparison of Hydrolysis Pretreatment Technologies and Summary 155 Acknowledgment 157 References 157 9 Biological Pretreatment of Lignocellulosic Biomass 161 Sehanat Prasongsuk, Wichanee Bankeeree, Pongtharin Lotrakul, Suraini Abd-Aziz, and Hunsa Punnapayak 9.1 Introduction 161 9.2 Microorganisms and Enzymes Involved in Biological Pretreatment 162 9.2.1 Fungal Pretreatment 164 9.2.2 Enzymatic Pretreatment 165 9.3 Factors Affecting Biological Pretreatment 168 9.3.1 Cultivation Condition 168 9.3.2 Incubation Time 168 9.3.3 Moisture Content 168 9.3.4 pH and Temperature 168 9.4 Biological Pretreatment of Lignocellulosic Biomass into Value-Added Products 169 9.4.1 Bioconversion into Fermentable Sugar for Bioethanol Production 169 9.4.2 Biogas Production 171 9.5 Conclusions 172 Acknowledgment 173 References 173 10 Lignin-Degrading Enzymes 179 Adriana C. Lee, Mohamad Faizal Ibrahim, and Suraini Abd-Aziz 10.1 Introduction 179 10.2 Lignin Types and Structures 180 10.3 Lignin-Degrading Enzymes (LDEs) 181 10.3.1 Lignin Peroxidase or Ligninase (LiP) 181 10.3.2 Manganese Peroxidase (MnP) 183 10.3.3 Versatile Peroxidase (VP) 185 10.3.4 Dye-Decolorizing Peroxidases (DyPs) 185 10.3.5 Laccase 186 10.3.6 New Enzymatic Delignification Activities 189 10.3.6.1 β-Etherases (Glutathione-Dependent Lignin-Degrading Enzyme) 189 10.3.6.2 Biphenyl-Binding Enzyme Cleavage Systems 190 10.3.6.3 Enzyme O-Demethylation Networks 190 10.3.6.4 Activities of General Oxidative 190 10.4 Application of LDE in Biorefinery Pretreatment 191 10.5 Conclusions 194 References 194 11 Enzymes for Hemicellulose Degradation 199 Wichanee Bankeeree, Sehanat Prasongsuk, Pongtharin Lotrakul, Suraini Abd-Aziz, and Hunsa Punnapayak 11.1 Introduction 199 11.2 Hemicellulolytic Enzymes 200 11.3 Xylanolytic Enzyme Classification 201 11.4 Catalytic Mechanisms 204 11.5 Sources and Properties of Xylanolytic Enzymes 205 11.5.1 Bacterial Xylanolytic Enzymes 205 11.5.2 Fungal Xylanolytic Enzymes 207 11.6 Potential Biotechnological Applications 209 11.6.1 Biorefinery 209 11.6.2 Pulp and Paper Industry 211 11.6.3 Biotransformation 212 11.7 Conclusions 213 Acknowledgment 214 References 214 12 Cellulase from Oil Palm Biomass 221 Jeong Eun Hyeon and Sung Ok Han 12.1 Biological Pretreatment and Cellulase 221 12.2 Cellulases 222 12.2.1 Endoglucanase (1,4-D-glucan-4-glucanohydrolase; EC 3.2.1.4) 223 12.2.2 Exocellobiohydrolase (1,4-D-glucan glucohydrolase; EC 3.2.1.74) 224 12.2.3 β-Glucosidase (D-glucoside glucohydrolase; EC 3.2.1.21) 225 12.3 Synergistic Effect by Combination of Various Cellulases 226 12.3.1 Cellulosome 226 12.3.2 Artificial Cellulosome 229 12.4 Industrial Strain for Cellulases Production 230 12.4.1 Cellulases Production by Fungal Cellulase System 230 12.4.2 Cellulases Production by Bacterial Cellulase Systems 232 12.5 Conclusions 233 Acknowledgment 233 References 234 Part III Generation of Bioenergy 239 13 Biogas Generation in the Palm Oil Mill 241 Muhammad Y. Arya, Muhammad A. Kholiq, Udin Hasanudin, and Misri Gozan 13.1 Introduction 241 13.2 POME Characterization 243 13.3 POME Pretreatment 243 13.3.1 Acidified POME 246 13.3.2 Ash Addition 246 13.3.3 Coagulation–Flocculation 248 13.3.4 De-oiling 248 13.3.5 Dissolved Air Flotation 249 13.3.6 POME Sedimentation 249 13.3.7 Thermal Pretreatment 249 13.3.8 Other Pretreatments 249 13.4 Digester Type 250 13.4.1 Anaerobic Pond/Lagoon 250 13.4.2 Anaerobic Filtration 251 13.4.3 Fluidized Bed Reactor 253 13.4.4 Upflow Anaerobic Sludge Blanket (UASB) 253 13.4.5 Anaerobic Baffled Reactor 253 13.5 Operating Conditions 253 13.5.1 Substrate Characterization 253 13.5.2 pH and Alkalinity 254 13.5.3 Organic Loading Rate (OLR) and Hydraulic Retention Time (HRT) 254 13.5.4 Temperature 255 13.5.5 Other Operating Conditions 256 13.6 Biogas Purification 257 13.7 Conclusions 257 References 258 14 Biodiesel Refinery from Jatropha 265 Penjit Srinophakun, Anusith Thanapimmetha, and Maythee Saisriyoot 14.1 Introduction 265 14.2 Jatropha Biodiesel 265 14.2.1 Biodiesel Standard 273 14.2.2 Oxidation Stability 273 14.2.3 The Changes of Biodiesel Properties During Long-Term Storage 278 14.3 Conclusions 281 Acknowledgment 282 References 283 15 Bioethanol from Oil Producing Plants 287 Yu-Shen Cheng, Kittipong Rattanaporn, and Malinee Sriariyanun 15.1 Introduction 287 15.2 Plant Components Derived from Oil Producing Plants as the Biomass Resources 290 15.2.1 Oil Producing Plants 290 15.2.2 Oil Meals/Cakes Derived from Oilseed as Lignocellulosic Biomass 291 15.2.3 Other Lignocellulosic Residues Derived from Oil Plants 293 15.3 Conversion of Oil Plant-Derived Lignocellulosic Biomass to Bioethanol 294 15.3.1 Structure of Lignocellulosic Biomass Derived from Oil Plants 294 15.3.2 Lignocellulosic Biomass Pretreatment and Enzymatic Hydrolyses 296 15.3.3 Bioethanol Production from Oil Producing Plant 299 15.4 Conclusions 300 References 300 16 Biobutanol Production from Oil Palm Biomass 307 Mohamad Faizal Ibrahim, Nor A. Shaharuddin, Nurul H. Alias, Mohd A. Jenol, Suraini Abd-Aziz, and Lai-Yee Phang 16.1 Introduction 307 16.2 Oil Palm Biomass 308 16.3 Biobutanol 310 16.4 Biobutanol Production 312 16.4.1 Biobutanol-Producing Bacteria 312 16.4.1.1 Clostridium sp. 312 16.4.1.2 Lactobacillus 314 16.4.1.3 Escherichia coli 315 16.4.2 Factors Affecting Biobutanol Production 315 16.4.2.1 Effect of Nitrogen Source 315 16.4.2.2 Effect of pH 315 16.4.2.3 Effect of Temperature 316 16.4.2.4 Effect of Carbon Source 316 16.5 Biobutanol Production from Oil Palm Biomass 317 16.6 Conclusions 320 References 321 17 Biochar from Oil Palm Biomass 325 Z. Nahrul Hayawin and Juferi Idris 17.1 Introduction 325 17.2 Oil Palm Biomass in Malaysia 326 17.3 Oil Palm Biochar Production 326 17.3.1 Mechanistic Aspects of Pyrolysis 326 17.3.2 Pyrolysis Process Parameters Affecting the Quality and Quantity of Biochar Production 327 17.3.3 Technologies for Biochar Production 329 17.3.3.1 Conventional Pyrolysis 329 17.3.3.2 Microwave Pyrolysis 329 17.3.4 Application of Biochar 331 17.3.4.1 Environmental Remediation 331 17.3.4.2 Agricultural Application 331 17.3.4.3 Energy Purposes 332 17.4 Safety and Environmental Considerations 333 17.4.1 Safety Consideration and Environmental Impacts in the Application of Biochar 333 17.4.2 Safety Consideration and Environmental Impact in Handling and Storing Oil palm Biomass Feedstock 334 17.4.3 Safety Consideration and Environmental Impacts in Biochar Production by Pyrolysis Process 334 17.5 Biochar Utilization and Marketing 335 17.5.1 Quality of Biochar 335 17.5.2 Physical and Chemical Characteristics of Biochar 335 17.5.3 Adsorption Capacity 336 17.5.4 Economic Analysis 336 17.5.5 Major Challenges in Promoting Biochar 337 17.5.5.1 Cost and Production Complications 337 17.5.5.2 Environmental Factors 338 17.5.5.3 Public Acceptance 338 17.5.5.4 Marketability and Commercialization Issues 339 17.6 Conclusions 339 References 339 18 Fuel Pellet from Oil Producing Plants 345 Rizal Alamsyah 18.1 Introduction 345 18.2 Production of Fuel Pellet 347 18.2.1 Energy and Proximate Analysis 347 18.2.2 Size Reduction and Screening 348 18.2.3 Drying and Weighing 348 18.2.4 Mixing 349 18.2.5 Pelletizing 349 18.2.6 Cooling and Packing 349 18.3 Pellet Quality 350 18.3.1 Ash Content 350 18.3.2 Ash Melting Temperature 351 18.3.3 Length, Diameter, and Bulk Density 351 18.3.4 Dust 352 18.3.5 Caloric Value and Moisture Content 352 18.3.6 Mechanical Durability 352 18.3.7 Nitrogen, Sulfur, Chlorine Content, and Heavy Metals 353 18.4 Pilot Plant-Scale Biomass Pellet Experiment 353 18.5 Gasification of Biomass Pellets to Produce Synthetic Gas (Syngas) and Emission Test 356 18.5.1 Gasification 356 18.5.2 Emissions Test 357 18.6 Biomass Pellet Processing Equipment 359 18.6.1 Chaff Cutter 359 18.6.2 Hammer Mill 361 18.6.3 Cyclone Dust Collector 361 18.6.4 Paddle Mixer 362 18.6.5 Pellet Machine (Pelletizer) 362 18.6.6 Cooler 363 18.6.7 Packing Machine (Bagging Scale) 364 18.7 Conclusions 364 References 364 19 Biohydrogen from Palm Oil Mill Effluent 369 Safa Senan Mahmod, Peer Mohamed Abdul, and Jamaliah Md. Jahim 19.1 Introduction 369 19.2 Biohydrogen-Producing Bacteria 371 19.3 Strategies to Increase Biohydrogen Production from POME 374 19.3.1 Operating Conditions Optimization: Hydraulic Retention Time (HRT) and Temperature on Biohydrogen Production 374 19.3.1.1 Effect of Temperature 374 19.3.1.2 Effect of Different Hydraulic Retention Times (HRTs) 376 19.3.2 Microbial Cells Immobilization 378 19.3.3 Roles of Additives 380 19.4 Conclusions 383 19.5 Acknowledgments 383 References 383 Volume 2 Preface xiii About the Editors xv 20 A Glance on the Generation of Biobased Chemicals, Bioproducts and Economic Analysis of Oil Producing Plant 387 Misri Gozan and Suraini Abd-Aziz Part IV Generation of Biobased Chemicals 397 21 Bio-oil from Tobacco Plant 399 Andre F.P. Harahap, Ahmad Fauzantoro, and Misri Gozan 22 Biosurfactant from Oil Producing Plant 421 Zaharah Ibrahim, Siti Halimah Hasmoni, Shafinaz Shahir, Lai-Yee Phang, Nurashikin Ihsan, and Madihah Md Salleh 23 Palm Catanionic Surfactant for Drug Delivery Application 445 Wen Huei Lim, Xiou Shuang Yong, Lai-Yee Phang, and Noorjahan Banu Alitheen 24 Glycerol and Derivatives 469 Erliza Hambali, Rista Fitria, and Vonny I. Sari 25 Biovanillin from Oil Palm Biomass 493 Suraini Abd-Aziz, Mohd Azwan Jenol, and Illy Kamaliah Ramle 26 Diacids from Oil Producing Plant 515 Is Fatimah, Ganjar Fadillah, Oki Muraza, and Teuku M.I. Mahlia 27 Bioplastic Production from Oil Producing Plants 543 Lai-Yee Phang, Mitra Mohammadi, Mohd Azwan Jenol, and Misri Gozan 28 Plant Oil-Based Polyurethane 563 K. H. Badri and Amamer Redhwan 29 Bioresins from Oil Producing Plants 587 Misri Gozan, Agustino Zulys, and Hosta Ardhyananta Part V Generation of Other Bioproducts 605 30 Biocompost from Oil Producing Plants 607 Adibah Yahya, Nurshafika Abd Khalid, and Madihah Md Salleh 31 Animal Feed from Oil Producing Plants 631 Siswa Setyahadi 32 Amino Acids from Oil Producing Plants 653 Huszalina Hussin, Nurul S. Hanafi, Adriana C. Lee, Madihah Md Salleh, Shu-Cuen Sam, and Suraini Abd-Aziz Part VI Economics Analysis of Oil Producing Plants 673 33 Technical and Economic Aspects of Oil Producing Plants 675 Misri Gozan and Lai-Yee Phang 34 Economic Impact 699 Nugroho A. Sasongko and Rachmawan Budiarto Index 723
£266.86
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Introduction to Solid State Physics for Materials
Book SynopsisA concise, accessible, and up-to-date introduction to solid state physics Solid state physics is the foundation of many of today's technologies including LEDs, MOSFET transistors, solar cells, lasers, digital cameras, data storage and processing. Introduction to Solid State Physics for Materials Engineers offers a guide to basic concepts and provides an accessible framework for understanding this highly application-relevant branch of science for materials engineers. The text links the fundamentals of solid state physics to modern materials, such as graphene, photonic and metamaterials, superconducting magnets, high-temperature superconductors and topological insulators. Written by a noted expert and experienced instructor, the book contains numerous worked examples throughout to help the reader gain a thorough understanding of the concepts and information presented. The text covers a wide range of relevant topics, including propagation of electron and acoustic waves in crystals, electrical conductivity in metals and semiconductors, light interaction with metals, semiconductors and dielectrics, thermoelectricity, cooperative phenomena in electron systems, ferroelectricity as a cooperative phenomenon, and more. This important book: Provides a big picture view of solid state physics Contains examples of basic concepts and applications Offers a highly accessible text that fosters real understanding Presents a wealth of helpful worked examples Written for students of materials science, engineering, chemistry and physics, Introduction to Solid State Physics for Materials Engineers is an important guide to help foster an understanding of solid state physics.Table of ContentsPreface xi Introduction xiii 1 General Impact of Translational Symmetry in Crystals on Solid State Physics 1 1.1 Crystal Symmetry in Real Space 3 1.2 Symmetry and Physical Properties in Crystals 9 1.3 Wave Propagation in Periodic Media and Construction of Reciprocal Lattice 13 1.A Symmetry Constraints on Rotation Axes 18 1.B Twinning in Crystals 20 2 Electron Waves in Crystals 23 2.1 Electron Behavior in a Periodic Potential and Energy Gap Formation 23 2.2 The Brillouin Zone 28 2.3 Band Structure 31 2.4 Graphene 35 2.5 Fermi Surface 40 2.A Cyclotron Resonance and Related Phenomena 43 3 Elastic Wave Propagation in Periodic Media, Phonons, and Thermal Properties of Crystals 51 3.1 Linear Chain of the Periodically Positioned Atoms 51 3.2 Phonons and Heat Capacity 56 3.3 Thermal Vibrations of Atoms in Crystals 59 3.4 Crystal Melting 60 3.5 X-ray and Neutron Interaction with Phonons 61 3.5.1 Debye–Waller Factor 65 3.6 Lattice Anharmonicity 67 3.7 Velocities of Bulk AcousticWaves 69 3.8 Surface AcousticWaves 72 3.A Bose’s Derivation of the Planck Distribution Function 73 4 Electrical Conductivity in Metals 75 4.1 Classical Drude Theory 76 4.2 Quantum–Mechanical Approach 77 4.3 Phonon Contribution to Electrical Resistivity 80 4.4 Defects’ Contributions to Metal Resistivity 82 4.A Derivation of the Fermi-Dirac Distribution Function 84 5 Electron Contribution to Thermal Properties of Crystals 87 5.1 Electronic Specific Heat 87 5.2 Electronic Heat Conductivity and theWiedemann–Franz Law 92 5.3 Thermoelectric Phenomena 94 5.4 Thermoelectric Materials 98 6 Electrical Conductivity in Semiconductors 105 6.1 Intrinsic (Undoped) Semiconductors 105 6.2 Extrinsic (Doped) Semiconductors 110 6.3 p–n Junction 111 6.4 Semiconductor Transistors 117 6.A Estimation of Exciton’s Radius and Binding Energy 120 7 Work Function and Related Phenomena 123 7.1 Work Function of Metals 123 7.2 Photoelectric Effect 126 7.2.1 Angle-Resolved Photoemission Spectroscopy (APRES) 126 7.3 Thermionic Emission 128 7.4 Metal-Semiconductor Junction 131 7.A Image Charge Method 133 7.B A Free Electron Cannot Absorb a Photon 134 8 Light Interaction with Metals and Dielectrics 135 8.1 Skin Effect in Metals 137 8.2 Light Reflection from a Metal 138 8.3 Plasma Frequency 140 8.4 Introduction to Metamaterials 141 8.5 Structural Colors 148 8.A Acoustic Metamaterials 150 9 Light Interaction with Semiconductors 155 9.1 Solar Cells 155 9.1.1 The Grätzel Cell 159 9.1.2 Halide Perovskite Solar Cells 161 9.2 Solid State Radiation Detectors 162 9.2.1 Infrared Detectors 164 9.3 Charge-Coupled Devices (CCDs) 167 9.4 Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs) 168 9.5 Semiconductor Lasers 170 9.6 Photonic Materials 173 10 Cooperative Phenomena in Electron Systems: Superconductivity 177 10.1 Phonon-Mediated Cooper Pairing Mechanism 178 10.2 Direct Measurements of the Superconductor Energy Gap 182 10.3 Josephson Effect 184 10.4 Meissner Effect 185 10.5 SQUID 188 10.6 High-Temperature Superconductivity 189 10.A Fourier Transform of the Coulomb Potential 192 10.B The Josephson Effect Theory 193 10.C Derivation of the CriticalMagnetic Field in Type I Superconductors 195 11 Cooperative Phenomena in Electron Systems: Ferromagnetism 197 11.1 Paramagnetism and Ferromagnetism 198 11.2 The Ising Model 204 11.3 Magnetic Structures 205 11.4 Magnetic Domains 207 11.5 Magnetic Materials 210 11.6 Giant Magnetoresistance 211 11.A The Elementary Magnetic Moment of an Electron Produced by its Orbital Movement 214 11.B Pauli Paramagnetism 214 11.C Magnetic DomainWalls 216 12 Ferroelectricity as a Cooperative Phenomenon 219 12.1 The Theory of Ferroelectric Phase Transition 223 12.2 Ferroelectric Domains 227 12.3 The Piezoelectric Effect and Its Application in Ferroelectric Devices 230 12.4 Other Application Fields of Ferroelectrics 233 13 Other Examples of Cooperative Phenomena in Electron Systems 237 13.1 The Mott Metal–Insulator Transition 237 13.2 Classical and Quantum Hall Effects 241 13.3 Topological Insulators 247 13.A Electron Energies and Orbit Radii in the Simplified Bohr Model of a Hydrogen-like Atom 250 Further Reading 253 List of Prominent Scientists Mentioned in the Book 255 Index 265
£45.60
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Integrated Nanophotonics: Platforms, Devices, and
Book SynopsisIntegrated Nanophotonics Helps readers understand the important advances in nanophotonics materials development and their latest applications This book introduces the current state of and emerging trends in the development of integrated nanophotonics. Written by three well-qualified authors, it systematically reviews the knowledge of integrated nanophotonics from theory to the most recent technological developments. It also covers the applications of integrated nanophotonics in essential areas such as neuromorphic computing, biosensing, and optical communications. Lastly, it brings together the latest advancements in the key principles of photonic integrated circuits, plus the recent advances in tackling the barriers in photonic integrated circuits. Sample topics included in this comprehensive resource include: Platforms for integrated nanophotonics, including lithium niobate nanophotonics, indium phosphide nanophotonics, silicon nanophotonics, and nonlinear optics for integrated photonics The devices and technologies for integrated nanophotonics in on-chip light sources, optical packaging of photonic integrated circuits, optical interconnects, and light processing devices Applications on neuromorphic computing, biosensing, LIDAR, and computing for AI and artificial neural network and deep learning Materials scientists, physicists, and physical chemists can use this book to understand the totality of cutting-edge theory, research, and applications in the field of integrated nanophotonics.Table of ContentsPreface xi 1 Packaging and Test of Photonic Integrated Circuits (PICs) 1 Stéphane Bernabé, Tolga Tekin, Bogdan Sirbu, Jean Charbonnier, Philippe Grosse, and Moritz Seyfried 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Challenges and Specificities of PIC Packaging and Test 2 1.2.1 Optical Interconnects 3 1.2.2 Coupling Structures 5 1.2.2.1 Edge Coupler 5 1.2.2.2 Vertical Grating Coupler (VGC) 6 1.2.2.3 Evanescent Coupling 7 1.2.3 Wafer-level Test 7 1.2.4 Module Packaging 10 1.2.5 Fiber Optic Assembly (Pigtailing) 12 1.2.5.1 PIC Alignment to a Lensed Fiber 12 1.2.5.2 PIC Butt Coupling to a Standard Cleaved Single-mode Fiber 12 1.2.5.3 Lens Coupling Scheme 13 1.2.5.4 Optical Waveguide Interposer Coupling 14 1.2.6 Emerging Trends for Module Mass Manufacturing 15 1.3 Advances in Optical Coupling Strategies 18 1.3.1 Toward Passive Alignment Strategies 19 1.3.2 Advanced Technologies for Vision-Assisted Technologies 20 1.3.2.1 Open-Loop Alignment 20 1.3.2.2 Closed-Loop Alignment 20 1.3.3 Advanced Technologies for Self-alignment Strategies 21 1.3.3.1 Self-alignment of Fiber to PIC Through an Silicon Optical Bench Using Flip-Chip 22 1.3.3.2 Self-alignment-assisted Microlenses Assembly 22 1.3.3.3 Self-alignment of Polymer Waveguides 22 1.3.3.4 Self-alignment of Optical Plug 23 1.3.4 Laser/PIC Coupling 23 1.4 Electronic/Photonic Convergence 25 1.4.1 Flip-chip Interconnects 26 1.4.1.1 Standard Die-to-die interconnects 26 1.4.1.2 Advanced Interconnects for Future Needs 27 1.4.2 Intra-connections (Through Silicon Vias and Through Glass Vias) 29 1.4.2.1 TSV Last Process 29 1.4.2.2 TSV Middle Process 30 1.4.2.3 Through Glass Via (TGV) 31 1.4.3 Fan-out Wafer-level Packaging (FOWLP) 31 1.4.4 Interposers Integration Approach 32 1.4.4.1 Interposers for Electronic Integrated Circuits (CMOS) 33 1.4.4.2 Photonic Interposer and Photonic Systems on Chip 34 1.5 Toward an Ecosystem in Test and Assembly of PICs 36 1.5.1 Design Rules for Packaging and Test 36 1.5.1.1 3D Packaging 38 1.5.1.2 Design Rules for Testing 39 1.5.2 Advanced Techniques for Wafer-level Test 39 1.5.3 Recent Achievements and Future Aspects in Assembly Machines 40 1.6 Conclusion 45 Acknowledgments 46 References 46 2 The Last Mile Technology of Silicon Photonics Toward Productions and Emerging Applications 53 Bo Li, Shawn Yohanes Siew, Feng Gao, Shawn Wu Xie, Qiang Li, Chao Li, Xianshu Luo, Guo-Qiang Lo, and Junfeng Song 2.1 Introduction 53 2.2 Fiber-to-Chip Assembly 55 2.3 Hybrid Integration of Light Source 59 2.4 Electronic and Photonic Co-Packaging 63 2.5 Outlook 65 2.5.1 Silicon Photonics Emerging Applications 65 2.5.2 Opportunities and Challenges 68 References 70 3 Integrated Nonlinear Photonics and Emerging Applications 75 Yang Yue, Wenpu Geng, Yuxi Fang, and Yingning Wang 3.1 Introduction 75 3.2 Supercontinuum 77 3.2.1 Applications 77 3.2.2 History of SCG in Integrated Waveguides 79 3.2.3 Representative Works 83 3.3 Optical Frequency Comb 90 3.3.1 Microresonator-Based OFC 91 3.3.2 SC-Based OFC 99 3.3.3 EO-Based OFC 99 3.3.4 MLL-Based OFC 99 3.3.5 Applications 101 3.4 Nonlinear Wave Mixing 102 3.4.1 Introduction 102 3.4.2 Nonlinear Optical Signal Processing in Integrated Waveguides 105 3.4.3 Representative Works 108 3.5 Conclusion and Perspectives 116 References 117 4 Excitation, Generation, Positioning, and Modulation for Quantum Light Sources Integrated on Chip 135 Cuo Wu, Cuiping Ma, and Zhiming Wang 4.1 Introduction 135 4.2 Excitation and Orientation of Quantum Emitters 136 4.3 Chip-Scale Integration Based on Quantum Emitters 141 4.3.1 Solution-Based Colloidal and Self-Assembled Quantum Dots 141 4.3.2 Strain-Induced Emitter Sites of Two-Dimensional Materials 144 4.3.3 Color Centers in Nanodiamond 148 4.4 Deterministically Positioning of Quantum Emitter 154 4.5 Quantum Light Interaction with Metasurface for Modulation 156 4.6 Conclusion 159 References 160 5 Quantum Light Sources in Two-Dimensional Materials 167 Yanan Wang and Philip X.-L. Feng 5.1 Introduction 167 5.2 Theory of Quantum Light Sources 168 5.2.1 Photon Statistics 168 5.2.1.1 Thermal Light 169 5.2.1.2 Coherent Light 170 5.2.1.3 Squeezed Light 170 5.2.2 Characteristics of Quantum Light Sources 172 5.2.2.1 Wavelength 172 5.2.2.2 Lifetime, Emission Rate, and Brightness 172 5.2.2.3 Emission Linewidth 173 5.2.2.4 Zero-Phonon Line (ZPL) and Debye–Waller Factor 173 5.2.2.5 Photon Polarization and Dipole Orientation 173 5.2.2.6 Optically Addressable Spin State 174 5.2.2.7 Indistinguishability 174 5.3 Quantum Light Sources in 2D Materials 175 5.3.1 Localized Excitons in Transition Metal Dichalcogenides 176 5.3.2 Defect Centers in Hexagonal Boron Nitride 179 5.3.3 Graphene Quantum Dots 183 5.3.4 Quantum Light-Emitting Diodes 186 5.4 Integration with On-Chip Components 189 5.4.1 Theory of SPE-Cavity Coupling 190 5.4.1.1 Strong Coupling Regime 190 5.4.1.2 Weak Coupling Regime 191 5.4.2 Integration with Dielectric Waveguides and Cavities 191 5.4.2.1 Transferring 2D SPEs onto Predefined Structures 192 5.4.2.2 Transferring or Fabricating Photonic Structures on 2D Materials 194 5.4.2.3 Monolithic Integration 195 5.4.3 Integration with Plasmonic Waveguides and Cavities 197 5.5 Integration with Off-Chip Components 199 5.5.1 Flip-chip Integration 199 5.5.2 Integration with Optic Fibers 200 5.6 Summary and Outlook 202 Acknowledgments 203 References 204 6 Inverse Design for Integrated Photonics Using Deep Neural Network 209 Keisuke Kojima, Toshiaki Koike-Akino, Yingheng Tang, and Ye Wang 6.1 Introduction 209 6.2 Deep Neural Network (DNN) Models 210 6.2.1 Forward Modeling 211 6.2.2 Inverse Modeling 212 6.2.3 Generative Modeling 212 6.3 Deep Learning for Forward Modeling to Predict Optical Response 212 6.4 Deep Learning for Inverse Modeling to Construct Device Topology 217 6.5 Deep Learning for Generative Modeling to Produce Device Topology Candidates 220 6.6 Physics-informed Neural Networks 225 6.7 Nanophotonic Power Splitter Design Using Generative Modeling 227 6.7.1 Device Structure 228 6.7.2 Device Simulation Procedure 229 6.7.3 Network Architecture 230 6.7.4 Network Training Procedure 231 6.7.5 Device Generation Performance 232 6.7.6 Hyperparameters 234 6.7.7 Adjoint Method vs. Deep Learning 234 6.8 Deep Learning Techniques 235 6.8.1 Convolutional Neural Networks 235 6.8.2 Transfer Learning and Fine Tuning 235 6.8.3 AutoML: Meta Learning, Learning to Learn, Network Architecture Search 236 6.9 Conclusion 237 References 237 7 Deep Learning Driven Data Processing, Modeling, and Inverse Design for Nanophotonics 245 Peter R. Wiecha, Nicholas J. Dinsdale, and Otto L. Muskens 7.1 Introduction 245 7.2 Artificial Neural Networks and Deep Learning 245 7.2.1 Artificial Neurons and Neural Networks 246 7.2.2 Training of Artificial Neural Networks 247 7.3 Ultrafast Physics Predictions 248 7.3.1 Specialized Physics Predictors: Fully Connected vs. Convolutional ANNs 249 7.3.2 Generalized Nanophotonics Predictor Network 252 7.4 Photonics Inverse Design 255 7.4.1 Predictor Network as a Surrogate Model for Optimization 256 7.4.1.1 Example: Polarization Conversion Maximization 257 7.4.1.2 Example: Maximize Magnetic Near-Field 258 7.4.2 Direct Inverse Design Networks 259 7.4.3 Optimizing Inverse Design Performance 260 7.4.3.1 Optimizing the Network Layout 262 7.4.3.2 Quality of the Initial Dataset 262 7.4.3.3 Iterative Training 264 7.4.3.4 Postprocessing 265 7.5 Advanced Data Processing for Photonics Applications 265 7.5.1 Optical Data Storage below the Diffraction Limit 265 7.5.2 Speckle Reconstruction for Real-time Hyperspectral Imaging 267 7.6 Conclusion and Outlook 269 References 270 8 Optical Waveguide of Lithium Niobate Nanophotonics 277 Yarub Al-Douri 8.1 Introduction 277 8.2 Photonics Lithium Niobate 278 8.3 Nanophotonic Lithium Niobate-Based Optical Waveguide 286 8.4 Optical Studies of Nanophotonic Lithium Niobate-Based Optical Waveguide 287 8.5 Nanophotonic LiNbO 3 Under Stirrer Time Effect 295 8.6 Nanophotonic Studies of LiNbO 3 Under Stirrer Time Effect 297 8.7 Conclusions 304 References 305 9 Active, Tunable, and Reconfigurable Nanophotonics 313 Trevon Badloe, Jaehyuck Jang, Heonyeong Jeong, Minsu Jeong, Inki Kim, Byoungsu Ko, Jihae Lee, Taejun Lee, Seong-Won Moon, Dong Kyo Oh, Younghwan Yang, Gwanho Yoon, and Junsuk Rho 9.1 Introduction 313 9.2 Liquid Crystal-Integrated Tunable Devices 314 9.2.1 Devices that Modulate Polarization 314 9.2.2 Devices that Modulate Effective Refractive Index 316 9.3 Optically Tunable Devices 318 9.3.1 Devices that Are Dependent on the Direction of Incident Light 318 9.3.2 Devices that Depend on Wavelength 319 9.3.3 Devices that Depend on Polarization (Spin) 321 9.3.4 Orbital Angular Momentum-dependent Devices 323 9.4 Phase Change Materials-Based Reconfigurable Devices 324 9.4.1 Switchable Absorbers 324 9.4.2 Thermochromic Smart Windows 327 9.5 Mechanically Tunable Photonic Devices 329 9.5.1 Tunable Devices that Use Micro-electro-mechanical Systems 329 9.5.2 Photonic Devices that Are Tuned Using Strain 331 9.6 Tunable Photonic Devices with Material Engineering 335 9.6.1 Bandgap Engineering for Tunable Solid-state Devices 335 9.6.2 Biomaterials for Tunable Biophotonic Devices 339 9.7 Electrically Tunable Photonic Devices 341 Acknowledgments 346 References 346 Index 359
£114.75
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Nitrogen-Rich Energetic Materials
Book SynopsisNitrogen-Rich Energetic Materials Provides in-depth and comprehensive knowledge on both the chemistry and practical applications of nitrogen-rich energetic materials Energetic materials, a class of material with high amounts of stored chemical energy, include explosives, pyrotechnics, and propellants. Initially used for military applications, nitrogen-rich energetic materials have become important in the civil engineering and aerospace sectors, they are increasingly used in commercial mining and construction as well as in rocket propulsion. Making these nitrogen-rich energetic materials safer, more powerful, and more cost-effective requires a thorough understanding of their chemistry, physics, synthesis, properties, and applications. Nitrogen-Rich Energetic Materials presents a detailed summary of the development of nitrogen-rich energetic materials over the past decade and provides up-to-date knowledge on their applications in various areas of advanced engineering. Edited by a panel of international experts in the field, this book examines the chemistry of pentazoles, fused ring and laser ignitable nitrogen-rich compounds, polynitrogen and tetrazole-based energetic compounds, and more. The text also introduces applications of nitrogen-rich energetic materials in energetic polymers and metal-organic frameworks, as pyrotechnics materials for light and smoke, and in oxadiazoles from precursor molecules. This authoritative volume: Presents in-depth chapters written by leading experts in each sub-field covered Offers a systematic introduction to new and emerging applications of nitrogen-rich energetic materials such as in computational chemistry Discusses recent advances in nitrate ester chemistry with focus on propellant applications Discusses green and eco-friendly approaches to nitrogen-rich compounds Nitrogen-Rich Energetic Materials is an important resource for researchers, academics, and industry professionals across fields, including explosives specialists, pyrotechnicians, materials scientists, polymer chemists, laser specialists, physical chemists, environmental chemists, chemical engineers, and safety officers.Table of ContentsPreface xi About the Editors xv 1 Chemistry of Pentazole 1Ming Lu, Pengcheng Wang, Yuangang Xu, and Qiuhan Lin 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Substituted Pentazoles 1 1.3 Strategies for the Preparation of cyclo-N5- 5 1.4 Complexes of Metal and cyclo-N5- 9 1.5 cyclo-N5--Based Nonmetallic Ionic Salts 25 1.6 Conclusions 43 2 Aromatic Fused-Ring-Based Energetic Compounds 47Kangcai Wang and Qinghua Zhang 2.1 Introduction 47 2.2 Fused-Ring Aromatic Energetic Compounds 49 2.3 Conclusions 68 3 Advances in Computations of Nitrogen-Rich Materials 73Lei Zhang and Chuang Yao 3.1 Why Computation and What Role It Plays? 73 3.2 Why Nitrogen-Rich HEDMs and How TheyWork? 74 3.3 Advances in Computation of First-Generation Nitrogen-Rich HEDMs 75 3.4 Advances in Computation of Second-Generation Nitrogen-Rich HEDMs 81 3.5 Advances in Computation of Third-Generation Nitrogen-Rich HEDMs: Polynitrogen Materials 84 3.6 Final Remarks 97 Acknowledgement 98 References 98 4 Laser Ignition of Energetic Transition Metal Complexes 107Maximilian Wurzenberger, Daniel Shem-Tov, and Jörg Stierstorfer 4.1 Introduction 107 4.2 Synthesis of Energetic Coordination Compounds 116 4.3 Synthesis of Energetic Tetrazole Ligands 116 4.4 Synthesis Energetic Coordination Complexes 121 4.5 Examples of Molecular Structures 122 4.6 Energetic Properties of Ligands and Corresponding Energetic Coordination Compounds 122 4.7 UV-Vis Spectroscopy of Energetic Coordination Compounds 128 4.8 Studies of Ignition Mechanism 128 4.9 Conclusions 134 5 Energetic 1,2,3,4-Tetrazines 139Aleksandr M. Churakov, Michael S. Klenov, Aleksey A. Voronin, and Vladimir A. Tartakovsky 5.1 Introduction 139 5.2 Methods of Synthesis and Reactivity of 1,2,3,4-Tetrazines 141 5.3 NMR and X-ray Studies 164 5.4 Thermal Stability 168 5.5 Applications 177 References 179 6 Recent Advances in Chemistry of Nitrogen-Rich Energetic Polymers and Plasticizers 189Michael Gozin and Leonid L. Fershtat 6.1 Introduction 189 6.2 Heterocyclic Energetic Polymers and Plasticizers 189 6.3 Nitrogen-Rich Energetic Polymers Lacking Traditional Explosophoric Groups 201 6.4 Azido-Rich Energetic Polymers and Plasticizers 202 6.5 Azido Fluoropolymers 216 6.6 Azido Plasticizers 219 6.7 Nitro Group Containing Polymers 225 6.8 Aromatic C-NO2 Containing Polymers 230 6.9 Conclusions 234 References 234 7 Tetrazole Energetic Salts Based on Various Explosophores: Recent Overview of Synthesis and Energetic Properties 239Saira Manzoor, Qamar-un-nisa Tariq, and Jian-Guo Zhang 7.1 Introduction 239 7.2 Tetrazole-Based Energetic Salts 241 7.3 Conclusion and Future Trends 278 7.4 Cautions 280 Acknowledgments 280 References 280 8 Properties and Application of Nitrogen-Rich Compound BTATz in Low-Signature Propellants 285Jianhua Yi, Zhihua Sun, Yi Xu, Zhao Qin, Changjian Wang, Bozhou Wang, Hui Li, Haijian Li, Chao Chen, Xiao Xie, and Fengqi Zhao 8.1 Introduction 285 8.2 Synthesis of BTATz 286 8.3 Structure of BTATz 287 8.4 Properties of BTATz 290 8.5 Energetic Properties of the Propellants 291 8.6 Plume Smoke Signature of the Propellants 295 8.7 Preparation of the Propellants 296 8.8 Decomposition Reaction Kinetics and Thermal Safety of the Propellants 297 8.9 Combustion Properties of the Propellants 319 8.10 Correlation Between PDSC Characteristic Values and Burning Rates 324 8.11 Conclusions 326 References 327 9 Nitro-substituted Oxadiazoles: Important Building Blocks in the Synthesis of Energetic Compounds 331Philip Pagoria 9.1 Introduction 331 9.2 Enthalpy of Formation of Oxadiazoles 331 9.3 1,2,4-Oxadiazoles 332 9.4 1,3,4-Oxadiazoles 339 9.5 Furazans (1,2,5-Oxadiazole) and Furoxans (1,2,5-Oxadiazole-2-Oxides) 344 9.6 Summary 365 10 Insensitive High Explosives Containing Tetraazapentalene Moiety 377Ernst-Christian Koch 10.1 Introduction 377 10.2 Synthesis of TACOT Derivatives 377 10.3 Crystal and Molecular Structure 383 10.4 Spectroscopy 385 10.4.1 NMR Spectroscopy 385 10.5 Thermochemistry 386 10.6 Detonation Performance 388 10.7 Thermal Behavior 390 10.8 Sensitivity 391 10.9 Conclusions 392 Acknowledgments 392 Abbreviations 392 References 393 11 Nitrogen-Rich Pyrotechnic Materials for Light and Smoke 397Thomas M. Klapötke and Magdalena Rusan 11.1 Light-Generating Pyrotechnics 397 11.2 Smokes 405 11.2.1 White Smoke 411 11.2.2 Colored Smoke 412 Acknowledgments 413 References 413 Index 415
£114.75
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Additive Manufacturing Technology: Design,
Book SynopsisAdditive Manufacturing Technology Highly comprehensive resource covering all key aspects of the current developments of additive manufacturing Additive Manufacturing Technology: Design, Optimization, and Modeling provides comprehensive and in-depth knowledge of the latest advances in various additive manufacturing technologies for polymeric materials, metals, multi-materials, functionally graded materials, and cell-laden bio-inks. It also details the application of numerical modeling in facilitating the design and optimization of materials, processes, and printed parts in additive manufacturing. The topics covered in this book include: Fundamentals and applications of 4D printing, 3D bioprinting of cell-laden bio-inks, and multi-material additive manufacturing Alloy design for metal additive manufacturing, mechanisms of metallurgical defect formation, and the mechanical properties of printed alloys Modified inherent strain method for the rapid prediction of residual stress and distortion within parts fabricated by additive manufacturing Modeling of the different stages in polymer and metal additive manufacturing processes, including powder spreading, melting, and thermal stress evolution By providing extensive coverage of highly relevant concepts and important topics in the field of additive manufacturing, this book highlights its essential role in Industry 4.0 and serves as a valuable resource for scientists, engineers, and students in materials science, engineering, and biomedicine.Table of ContentsChapter 1. Introduction Chapter 2. Powder Bed Fusion Additive Manufacturing of Polymer Composites Chapter 3. 4D printing Chapter 4. Additive Manufacturing of Biomaterials Chapter 5. Recent Progress in 3D Cell Printing Technologies Chapter 6. Alloy Design for Metal Additive Manufacturing Chapter 7. Additive Manufacturing of Ceramics Chapter 8. Additive Manufacturing of Multiple Materials and Functionally Graded Material Components Chapter 9. Modified Inherent Strain Method for Predicting Residual Stress in Metal Additive Manufacturing Chapter 10. High-Fidelity Modeling of Metal Additive Manufacturing Chapter 11. Modeling of Polymer Powder-Based Additive Manufacturing Chapter 12. Design and Optimization for Additive Manufacturing
£114.75
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Hairy Nanoparticles: From Synthesis to
Book SynopsisHairy Nanoparticles Authoritative reference summarizing comprehensive knowledge on hairy nanoparticles, their self-assembly, interfacial behavior, and applications in catalysis, biomedicine, lubricant technology, etc. Hairy Nanoparticles provides a comprehensive understanding of the subject, including hairy nanoparticles synthesis, self-assembly (both experiment and simulation), properties, functionalities, and applications. Rendering polymer hairs on the surface of nanoparticles enables hairy nanoparticles to carry a set of intriguing properties. Contributed to by experts in the field and edited by two highly qualified authors, Hairy Nanoparticles includes information on: Hairy nanoparticles via bulk microphase separation of block copolymers and self-assembly of block copolymers in solution Synthesis of monodisperse nanoparticles via block copolymer unimolecular micelles nanoreactors and application of polymer-capped nanoparticles Environmentally responsive well-defined binary mixed homopolymer brush-grafted silica particles and thermoresponsive polymer brush-grafted silica particles Self-assembled morphologies of well-defined binary mixed homopolymer brushes grafted on silica nanoparticles (MBNPs) and computer simulations of the self-assembled morphology of MBNPs Upper critical solution temperature (UCST)-type thermoresponsive poly(alkyl methacrylate)s in SpectraSyn™ 4 PAO oil. Providing comprehensive coverage of the subject, Hairy Nanoparticles is an essential introductory resource for scientists and engineers in the fields of chemistry, materials science and engineering, polymer science and engineering, nanobiotechnology, and biomedicine, working in both academia and industry.Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Synthesis of Hairy Nanoparticles 1 Zongyu Wang, Jiajun Yan, Michael R. Bockstaller, and Krzysztof Matyjaszewski 1.1 Introduction to Grafting Chemistry 1 1.2 Surface Functionalization of Nanoparticles 2 1.2.1 Surface Modification by Chemical Treatment 2 1.2.2 Surface Modification by Plasma Treatment 8 1.2.3 Synthesis of Functionalized Nanoparticles Through Initiator-Containing Precursors 8 1.3 Synthesis of Hairy Nanoparticles 9 1.3.1 Surface-Initiated Polymerization/The “Grafting-from” Approach 9 1.3.1.1 SI-Free Radical Polymerization 10 1.3.1.2 Si-atrp 10 1.3.1.3 Si-raft 17 1.3.1.4 Other Polymerization Techniques 19 1.3.2 The “Grafting-onto” Approach 21 1.3.2.1 Conventional “Grafting-onto” Approach 21 1.3.2.2 Ligand Exchange 23 1.3.3 Template Synthesis 24 1.3.3.1 Block Copolymer and Its Derivative Templates 24 1.3.3.2 Star/Bottlebrush Polymer Templates 25 1.4 The Role of “Architecture” in Hairy Nanoparticles 25 1.4.1 Conformation of Hairy Nanoparticles 26 1.4.2 Bimodal Hairy Nanoparticles 31 1.5 Conclusion 32 Acknowledgment 34 References 34 2 Hairy Nanoparticles via Self-assembled Linear Block Copolymers 49 Zhen Zhang, Yi Shi, and Yongming Chen 2.1 Introduction 49 2.2 Hairy NPs via Bulk Microphase Separation of Block Copolymers 50 2.2.1 Bulk Microphase Separation of Diblock Copolymers 50 2.2.1.1 Theoretical Research 51 2.2.1.2 Experimental Study 52 2.2.1.3 Effect Factors 53 2.2.2 Bulk Microphase Separation of Triblock Copolymers 54 2.2.3 Preparation of Hairy NPs with Different Shapes 55 2.2.3.1 Diblock Copolymers with PTEPM or PGMA Components 56 2.2.3.2 Diblock Copolymers Containing PS 56 2.2.3.3 Triblock Copolymer System with PS Components 59 2.3 Hairy NPs via the Self-assembly of Block Copolymer in Solution 61 2.3.1 Morphology of Block Copolymers Assembly 62 2.3.1.1 Spherical Micelles 62 2.3.1.2 Rod-Like Micelles 63 2.3.1.3 Bilayer Structure 63 2.3.1.4 New Morphologies 64 2.3.2 Preparation of Hairy Copolymer NPs 65 2.3.3 Major Factors Influencing the Morphology of Hairy NPs 65 2.3.3.1 Block Copolymer Composition 65 2.3.3.2 Block Copolymer Concentration 66 2.3.3.3 The Nature of the Solvent 66 2.3.3.4 Additives 67 2.3.3.5 Other Factors 68 2.4 Summary 69 References 69 3 Hairy Nanoparticles via Unimolecular Block Copolymer Nanoreactors 73 Wenjie Zhang and Xinchang Pang 3.1 Background 73 3.2 Synthesis and Properties of Block Copolymer Unimolecular Micelles 75 3.2.1 Properties of Unimolecular Block Copolymer Micelles 75 3.2.2 Synthesis and Features of Star-Liked Block Copolymers 77 3.2.2.1 Synthesis of Star-Liked Block Copolymers via Core-First Method 77 3.2.2.2 Synthesis of Star-Liked Block Copolymers via Arm-First Method 83 3.2.3 Synthesis of Bottle Brush-Liked Block Copolymer 84 3.3 Synthesis of Monodispersed Nanoparticles via Block Copolymer Unimolecular Micelles Nanoreactors 88 3.3.1 Star-Like Block Copolymers as Unimolecular Nanoreactors 88 3.3.1.1 Plain Nanoparticles 88 3.3.1.2 Core@Shell Nanoparticles 94 3.3.1.3 Hollow Nanoparticles 97 3.3.1.4 Nanoring 99 3.3.1.5 Colloidal Nanoparticles Assemblies 102 3.3.2 Cylindrical Polymer Brushes as Unimolecular Nanoreactors 104 3.4 Application of Polymer-Capped Nanoparticles 111 3.4.1 Solar Energy Conversion 112 3.4.2 Light-Emitting Diodes 113 3.4.3 Lithium-Ion Batteries 114 3.4.4 Catalysis 115 3.5 Conclusions and Perspectives 117 3.5.1 Conclusion 117 3.5.2 Perspectives 117 References 119 4 Environmentally Responsive Hairy Inorganic Particles 123 Caleb A. Bohannon, Ning Wang, and Bin Zhao 4.1 Introduction 123 4.2 Environmentally Responsive Well-defined Binary Mixed Homopolymer Brush-grafted Silica Particles 126 4.2.1 Introduction to Mixed Polymer Brushes 126 4.2.2 Mixed Polymer Brushes Grafted on Particles 129 4.2.3 Synthesis of Well-defined Binary Mixed Homopolymer Brushes on Silica Particles 130 4.2.4 Responsive Properties of Binary Mixed Homopolymer Brush-grafted Silica Particles 134 4.3 Thermoresponsive Polymer Brush-grafted Silica Particles 141 4.3.1 Synthesis and Thermally Induced LCST Transition of Thermoresponsive Polymer Brushes Grafted on Silica Particles 141 4.3.2 Thermally Induced Phase Transfer of Thermoresponsive Hairy Particles Between Two Immiscible Liquid Phases 144 4.3.2.1 Thermally Induced Phase Transfer of Thermoresponsive Hairy Particles Between Water and Immiscible Organic Solvents 144 4.3.2.2 Thermally induced Phase Transfer of Thermoresponsive Hairy Particles Between Water and a Hydrophobic Ionic Liquid 146 4.3.3 Thermoreversible Gelation of Thermoresponsive Diblock Copolymer Brush-grafted Silica Nanoparticles in Water 150 4.3.4 Thermoresponsive Polymer Brush-grafted Nanoparticles for Enhancing Gelation of Thermoresponsive Linear ABC Triblock Copolymers in Water 156 4.4 Summary and Outlook 160 Acknowledgements 161 References 161 5 Self-Assembly of Hairy Nanoparticles with Polymeric Grafts 167 Xiaoxue Shen, Huibin He, and Zhihong Nie 5.1 Introduction 167 5.2 Self-Assembly of PGNPs into Colloidal Molecules 168 5.2.1 Precisely Defined Assembly of Patchy NPs 168 5.2.1.1 Isotropic NPs 169 5.2.1.2 Anisotropic NPs 171 5.2.2 Polymer-Guided Assembly of NPs 172 5.3 Self-Assembly of PGNPs Into One-Dimensional (1-D) Structures 175 5.3.1 Self-Assembly of PGNPs in Solution Guided by Various Molecular Interactions 176 5.3.1.1 Self-Assembly Driven by Neutralization Reaction 176 5.3.1.2 Self-Assembly Driven by Hydrophobic Interaction 178 5.3.1.3 Self-Assembly Driven by Dipolar Interaction 180 5.3.2 Templated Self-Assembly of PGNPs into 1-D Structures 182 5.3.2.1 Hard Template-Assisted Assembly of PGNPs 182 5.3.2.2 Self-Assembly of PGNPs Assisted by Soft Templates 184 5.3.3 The Self-Assembly of 1-D Structures in Polymer Films 187 5.4 Self-Assembly of PGNPs into 2-D Structures 190 5.4.1 Templated Self-Assembly of PGNPs into 2-D Structures 190 5.4.1.1 Self-Assembly Using BCPs as Templates 190 5.4.1.2 Hard Template-Assisted Self-Assembly 193 5.4.2 Interfacial Assembly 193 5.4.3 2-D Assemblies Within Thin Film 197 5.4.3.1 PGNPs/Homopolymer System 197 5.4.3.2 Self-Assembly of Single-Component Neat PGNPs 199 5.4.3.3 Self-Assembly of Binary PGNPs Blends 201 5.5 Self-Assembly of PGNPs into 3-D Structures 202 5.5.1 Self-Assembly of PGNPs into Clusters 202 5.5.2 Self-Assembly of PGNPs into Vesicles 206 5.5.2.1 Self-Assembly of Hydrophilic Homopolymer-Grafted NPs 206 5.5.2.2 Self-Assembly of Mixed Homopolymer-Grafted NPs (M-PGNPs) 206 5.5.2.3 Self-Assembly of BCP-Grafted NPs (B-PGNPs) 209 5.5.2.4 Co-Assembly of Binary B-PGNPs or B-PGNPs/BCPs 210 5.5.3 Self-Assembly of PGNPs into 3-D Superlattices and Crystals 212 5.5.3.1 Superlattices and Crystals Assembled in Solution 212 5.5.3.2 Binary Superlattice Assembled at Interfaces 214 5.6 Representative Applications of Assembled PGNPs 215 5.6.1 Biological Applications: Imaging, Therapy, and Drug Delivery 215 5.6.1.1 Assemblies of Plasmonic PGNPs 216 5.6.1.2 Assemblies of Magnetic PGNPs 216 5.6.1.3 Assemblies of Plasmonic-Magnetic PGNPs 217 5.6.2 Dielectric Materials 218 5.7 Summary and Outlook 219 References 220 6 Interfacial Property of Hairy Nanoparticles 227 Yilan Ye and Zhenzhong Yang 6.1 Introduction 227 6.2 Hairy NPs as Interfacial Building Blocks 228 6.2.1 Conformation of Grafted Polymers in Good Solvents 228 6.2.2 Patchy and Janus Geometry in Selective Solvents 230 6.2.3 Interfacial Activity as Colloids 233 6.3 Hairy NPs Assembly at Various Interfaces 235 6.3.1 Dispersion in Polymer Nanocomposites 235 6.3.2 Anisotropic Assembly 237 6.3.3 Liquid–Liquid Interfaces 240 6.3.4 Air–Solid Surfaces 243 6.3.5 Air–Liquid Surfaces 244 6.4 Interfacial Entropy 246 6.5 Interfacial Jamming 248 6.5.1 Electrostatic Assembly 248 6.5.2 Host–Guest Molecular Recognition 251 6.6 Single-Chain NPs at Interfaces 251 6.6.1 Efficient Synthesis 251 6.6.1.1 Electrostatic-Mediated Intramolecular Crosslinking Toward Large-Scale Synthesis of SCNPs 252 6.6.1.2 Grafting Single-Chain at NPs 255 6.6.2 Interfacial Applications 256 References 258 7 Hairy Hollow Nanoparticles 261 Huiqi Zhang 7.1 Introduction 261 7.2 Overview of the Progress in the Design and Synthesis of Hairy Hollow NPs 262 7.2.1 Synthetic Strategies for Hairy Hollow Polymer NPs 262 7.2.1.1 Sacrificial Template Method 263 7.2.1.2 Self-Assembly (of Block Copolymers) Method 282 7.2.1.3 Single-Molecule Templating (of Core–Shell Bottlebrush Polymers) Method 288 7.2.2 Synthetic Strategies for Hairy Hollow Inorganic NPs 293 7.2.2.1 Direct Grafting of Polymer Brushes onto Hollow Inorganic NPs 293 7.2.2.2 Sacrificial Template Strategy Combined with Sol–Gel Chemistry and Polymer Brush-Grafting Methods 296 7.2.3 Synthetic Strategies for Hairy Hollow Organic/Inorganic Hybrid NPs 302 7.2.3.1 Direct Deposition of Polymer Layers onto Hollow Inorganic NPs by SI-Polymerizations 302 7.2.3.2 Self-Assembly Method 302 7.2.3.3 Single-Molecule Templating Method 304 7.2.3.4 Sacrificial Template Method Combined with Polymer Brush Nanoreactors 305 7.3 Conclusions and Perspectives 306 Acknowledgment 308 References 308 8 Self-Assembly of Binary Mixed Homopolymer Brush-Grafted Silica Nanoparticles 313 Bin Zhao, Ping Tang, Phoebe L. Stewart, Rong-Ming Ho, Christopher Y. Li, and Lei Zhu 8.1 Introduction 313 8.2 Computer Simulations of the Self-Assembled Morphology of MBNPs 315 8.3 Self-Assembled Morphologies of Well-Defined Binary Mixed Homopolymer Brushes Grafted on Silica NPs 318 8.3.1 Synthesis of Well-Defined Binary Mixed Homopolymer Brush-Grafted Silica NPs 318 8.3.2 Lateral Microphase Separation of Nearly Symmetric PtBA/PS MBNPs 319 8.3.3 Effect of Chain Length Disparity on the Self-Assembled Morphology of PtBA/PS MBNPs 320 8.3.4 Effect of Overall Grafting Density on Morphology of PtBA/PS MBNPs 324 8.3.5 Effect of Molecular Weight on Morphology of Symmetric MBNPs 327 8.3.6 Effect of Core Particle Size on Morphology of PtBA/PS MBNPs 332 8.3.7 3D Morphologies of PtBA/PS MBNPs by Cryo-TEM and Electron Tomography 335 8.4 Self-Assembled Morphology in Solvents and Homopolymer Matrices 339 8.4.1 Self-Assembly of MBNPs in Good and Selective Solvents 339 8.4.2 Self-Assembly of MBNPs in Homopolymer Matrices with Different Molecular Weights 341 8.5 Conclusions and Future Work 346 Acknowledgment 346 References 347 9 Hairy Plasmonic Nanoparticles 351 Christian Rossner, Tobias A.F. König, and Andreas Fery 9.1 Introduction 351 9.2 Plasmonic Properties of Isolated NPs and Energy Transfer to Adjacent Hairy Environment 354 9.2.1 Plasmonic Principles of Hairy NPs 354 9.2.2 Energy Transfer to Adjacent Hairy Environment 358 9.2.2.1 Hairy NPs for Photothermal Heating 358 9.2.2.2 Hairy NPs Conjugated with Photoactive Entities 360 9.2.2.3 Hairy NPs Conjugated with Acceptors 361 9.3 Plasmonic Coupling Scenarios of Hairy Plasmonic NPs 362 9.3.1 Supercolloidal Structures in Solution 362 9.3.2 Hairy NPs Linked to Surface and Self-assembly 366 9.4 Summary and Outlook Discussions 368 Acknowledgments 370 References 370 10 Hairy Metal Nanoparticles for Catalysis: Polymer Ligand-Mediated Catalysis 375 Zichao Wei and Jie He 10.1 Nanocatalysis Mediated by Surface Ligands 375 10.1.1 Surface Ligands as an Important Component for Nanocatalysis 375 10.1.2 Polymers as Better Ligands for NPs 377 10.2 Catalysis Mediated by PGNPs with Thiol-Terminated Polymers 380 10.3 Catalysis Mediated by PGNPs with NHC-Terminated Polymers 387 10.4 Other PGNP Nanocatalysts 393 10.5 Conclusion and Outlook 396 References 397 11 Hairy Inorganic Nanoparticles for Oil Lubrication 401 Michael T. Kelly and Bin Zhao 11.1 Introduction 401 11.1.1 Oil Lubrication 401 11.1.2 Nanoparticles as Oil Lubricant Additives for Friction and Wear Reduction 402 11.1.3 Polymer Brush-Grafted Nanoparticles: Definition and Synthesis 404 11.2 Oil-Soluble Poly(lauryl methacrylate) Brush-Grafted Metal Oxide NPs as Lubricant Additives 406 11.2.1 Synthesis, Dispersibility, and Stability in PAO of Poly(lauryl methacrylate) Brush-Grafted Silica and Titania NPs 406 11.2.2 Lubrication Properties of Poly(lauryl methacrylate) Brush-Grafted Silica and Titania NPs in PAO 410 11.3 Effects of Alkyl Pendant Groups on Oil Dispersibility, Stability, and Lubrication Property of Poly(alkyl methacrylate) Brush-Grafted Silica Nanoparticles 413 11.3.1 Synthesis of Poly(alkyl methacrylate) Brush-Grafted, 23-nm Silica NPs 413 11.3.2 Dispersibility and Stability of 23-nm Silica NPs Grafted with Poly(alkyl methacrylate) Brushes with Various Pendant Groups in PAO- 4 414 11.3.3 Effect of Alkyl Side Chains of Poly(alkyl methacrylate) Brushes on Lubrication Performance of 23-nm Hairy Silica NPs as Additives for Pao- 4 416 11.4 Improved Lubrication Performance by Combining Oil-Soluble Hairy Silica Nanoparticles and an Ionic Liquid as Additives for PAO- 4 420 11.4.1 Preparation of PAO-4 Lubricants with Various Amounts of PLMA Hairy Silica NPs and [P8888][DEHP] and Stability of Hairy Silica NPs in the Presence of [P8888][DEHP] 421 11.4.2 Lubrication Performances of PAO-4 Lubricants with the Addition of HNP, IL, and HNP + IL at Various Mass Ratios 422 11.4.3 SEM–EDS and XPS Analysis of Wear Scars Formed on Iron Flats from Tribological Tests 424 11.5 Upper Critical Solution Temperature (UCST)-Type Thermoresponsive Poly(alkyl methacrylate)s in PAO-4 426 11.5.1 Synthesis of Poly(alkyl methacrylate)s with Various Alkyl Pendant Groups by RAFT Polymerization and Their Thermoresponsive Properties in PAO-4 428 11.5.2 UCST-Type Thermoresponsive ABA Triblock Copolymers as Gelators for Pao-4 429 11.6 Summary 432 Acknowledgments 433 References 433 Index 437
£101.25
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Simulations in Bulk Solids Handling: Applications
Book SynopsisSimulations in Bulk Solids Handling Valuable resource for engineers and professionals dealing with bulk granular or powdered materials across industries using Discrete Element Methods (DEM) In many traditional university engineering programmes, no matter whether undergraduate or postgraduate, the behavior of granular materials is not covered in depth or at all. This omission leaves recent engineering graduates with little formal education in the major industrial area of bulk solids handling. This book teaches young professionals and engineers to find appropriate solutions for handling granular and powdered materials. It also provides valuable information for experienced engineers to gain an understanding and appreciation of the most significant simulation methods–DEM chief amongst them. For any student or professional involved with bulk solids handling, this book is a key resource to understand the most efficient and effective stimulation methods that are available today. Its comprehensive overview of the topic allows for upcoming professionals to ensure they have adequate knowledge in the field and for experienced professionals to improve their skills and processes.Table of Contents1. Introduction 2. DEM Particle Shape 3. DEM Material Flow 4. DEM Interparticle Forces 5. DEM Operation Optimization 6. DEM + Multibody Dynamics 7. DEM / CFD 8. CFD ? DPM + 2FM 9. DEM Processing 10. FDEM
£999.99
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Phases of Matter and their Transitions: Concepts and Principles for Chemists, Physicists, Engineers, and Materials Scientists
Phases of Matter and their Transitions An all-in-one, comprehensive take on matter and its phase properties In Phases of Matter and their Transitions, accomplished materials scientist Dr. Gijsbertus de With delivers an accessible textbook for advanced students in the molecular sciences. It offers a balanced and self-contained treatment of the thermodynamic and structural aspects of phases and the transitions between them, covering solids, liquids, gases, and their interfaces. The book lays the groundwork to describe particles and their interactions from the perspective of classical and quantum mechanics and compares phenomenological and statistical thermodynamics. It also examines materials with special properties, like glasses, liquid crystals, and ferroelectrics. The author has included an extensive appendix with a guide to the mathematics and theoretical models employed in this resource. Readers will also find: Thorough introductions to classical and quantum mechanics, intermolecular interactions, and continuum mechanics Comprehensive explorations of thermodynamics, gases, liquids, and solids Practical discussions of surfaces, including their general aspects for solids and liquids Fulsome treatments of discontinuous and continuous transitions, including discussions of irreversibility and the return to equilibrium Perfect for advanced students in chemistry and physics, Phases of Matter and their Transitions will also earn a place in the libraries of students of materials science.
£85.00
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Van der Waals Ferroelectrics: Properties and
Book SynopsisVan der Waals Ferroelectrics A comprehensive guide to a unique class of compounds with a variety of applications Since the discovery of graphene, there has been intensive interest in two-dimensional materials with similar electronic and industrial applications. The limitations on the usefulness of graphene itself, however, have powered the search for other materials with similar properties. One such class of materials, the phosphorous chalcogenides, has proven a particularly fruitful avenue for research, due to the favorable band gap and ferroelectric properties of these materials. Van der Waals Ferroelectrics provides, for the first time, a detailed overview of this highly relevant and sought-after class of materials, also known as transition metal chalcogenophosphates (TMCPs). Focusing on physical properties, the book explores the complex physics underlying these compounds as well as the unique characteristics that have driven their ever-increasing importance to the materials science community. Van der Waals Ferroelectrics readers will also find: Both computational and experimental perspectives on TCMP compounds In-depth discussion of the properties essential to the design and construction of devices like sensors, actuators, memory chips, and capacitors The first detailed review of the functional properties of TCMP compounds, such as ferrielectricity, electrostriction, and ionic conductivity Van der Waals Ferroelectrics is a useful reference for materials scientists, inorganic chemists, solid state chemists, solid state physicists, electrical engineers, and libraries supporting these professions.Table of ContentsIntroduction XI 1 Crystal Structure and Phase Transitions in Layered Crystals of Ternary Phosphorous Chalcogenides 1 1.1 Ferrielectric, Antiferroelectric, and Modulated Orderings in MM ′ P 2 X 6 (M – Cu, Ag; M ′ –In,Bi;X–S,Se) 1 1.2 Relaxor and Dipole Glassy States on the Phase Diagram of Cuinp 2 (se X S 1−x) 6 Mixed Crystals 3 1.2.1 XRD Investigations of CuInP 2 Se 6 4 1.2.2 Relaxor Phase in Mixed Cuinp 2 (s X Se 1−x) 6 Crystals 7 1.2.3 Dipolar Glass Phase in Mixed Cuinp 2 (s X Se 1−x) 6 Crystals 10 1.2.4 Influence of a Small Amount of Selenium to Phase-Transition Dynamics in CuInP 2 S 6 Crystals 12 1.2.5 Phase Diagram 13 1.3 Antiferromagnetic Ordering and Anisotropy of Magnetization in Multiferroics Cu(in 1−x Cr X)p 2 S 6 15 1.3.1 Temperature Dependence of the Magnetization 17 1.3.2 Field Dependence of the Magnetization and Anisotropy of Magnetization and Susceptibility 19 1.4 Magnetic Ordering in Mn 2 P 2 S 6 Crystal 21 1.5 Polar Layered Crystals of SnP 2 S 6 Type 30 References 34 2 Electronic Band Structure 41 2.1 Chemical Bonding in P 2 S(Se) 6 Structural Groups 41 2.2 Hybridization of the Electronic Valence Orbitals and Structural Stability of MM ′ P 2 S(Se) 6 -Type Compounds 43 2.3 Second-Order Jahn–Teller Effect and Dipole Ordering in Cu(Ag)InP 2 S(Se) 6 Crystals with d 10 Cu + and Ag + Cations 63 2.4 Second-Order Jahn–Teller Effect and Phase Transitions in Cu(Ag)BiP 2 S(Se) 6 Crystals with a Stereoactive Electronic Lone Pair of Bi 3+ 79 References 85 3 Optical Properties of MM ′ P 2 S(Se) 6 Crystals 95 3.1 DFT Calculated Electronic Band Structures and Optical Parameters 95 3.2 Temperature Dependence of the Optical Absorption for Mn 2 P 2 S 6 , AgInP 2 S 6 , CuInP 2 S(Se) 6 , and CuCrP 2 S 6 ,SnP 2 S 6 Layered Crystals 103 3.3 Appearance of Dipole Glassy State in the Edge Optical Absorption of Cuinp 2 (se X S 1−x) 6 Mixed Crystals 121 References 127 4 Phonon Spectra of Layered MM ′ P 2 S(Se) 6 Crystals 131 4.1 DFT Calculated Phonon Spectra in Different Phases 131 4.2 Raman Spectroscopy of CuInP 2 S 6 Crystal Across Ferrielectric Phase Transition 144 4.3 Phonon Spectra of Cuinp 2 (se X S 1−x) 6 Mixed Crystals 151 4.4 Anisotropy of Thermal Conductivity Temperature Dependence in Cu(Ag)In(Bi)P 2 S(Se) 6 Layered Crystals 160 4.5 Heat Capacity Anomalies at Dipole and Magnetic Ordering in CuInP 2 S(Se) 6 and CuCrP 2 S 6 Crystals 180 4.6 Spin–Phonon Coupling in Mn 2 P 2 S 6 Crystal 186 References 196 5 Semiconductor to Metal Transitions in SnP 2 S 6 -and Sn 2 P 2 S 6 -Type Compounds 201 5.1 Layered GeP 2 S 6 ,GeP 2 Se 6 ,GeP 2 Te 6 ,SnP 2 S 6 ,SnP 2 Se 6 , and SnP 2 Te 6 Polar Crystals with Pressure- or Chemical Composition-Induced Semiconductor–Metal Transition 201 5.2 Pressure-Induced Metal State in Sn 2 P 2 S 6 and Sn 2 P 2 Se 6 Compounds 208 5.3 DFT Calculated Transformation of Electron and Phonon Spectra at Transition into Polar Metal State 211 References 220 6 Dielectric and Ferroelectric Properties of Layered Phosphorus Chalcogenide Crystals 223 6.1 Anisotropy Effects in Thick-Layered CuInP 2 S 6 and CuInP 2 Se 6 Crystals 223 6.2 Dipole Glass State in Cu(in X Cr 1−x)p 2 S 6 Crystals 226 6.2.1 Phase Transitions in CuCrP 2 S 6 and CuIn 0.1 Cr 0.9 P 2 S 6 Crystals 227 6.2.2 Inhomogeneous Ferrielectrics 228 6.2.3 Dipole Glass State in Mixed Cuin X Cr 1−x P 2 S 6 Crystals 234 6.2.4 Phase Diagram of the Mixed Cuin X Cr 1−x P 2 S 6 Crystals 236 6.3 Nonlinear Dielectric Response of Layered (Ag,Cu)(In,Cr)P 2 S 6 Crystals 237 6.4 Dielectric Spectroscopy of CuBiP 2 Se 6 Crystals 244 6.4.1 Antiferroelectric Phase Transition 244 6.4.2 Freezing Phenomena 246 References 248 7 Ionic Conductivity and Low-Frequency Noise Spectroscopic Studies 251 7.1 Ionic Conductivity Investigations in CuInP 2 S 6 and CuIn 1+δ P 2 S 6 Crystals 251 7.2 Conductivity Spectroscopy of Aginp 2 (se X S 1–x) 6 and (cu X Ag 1–x)crp 2 S 6 Crystals 252 7.3 Low-Frequency Noise Spectroscopy of Layered CuInP 2 S 6 253 7.3.1 Intrinsic Noise Types 254 7.3.2 Experimental Techniques for Noise Determination 255 7.3.3 Noise Spectroscopy in Materials Science 256 7.3.4 Brief Overview of Low-Frequency Noise Spectroscopic Studies of CuInP 2 S 6 256 7.4 Electrical Conductivity of Layered Cuinp 2 (s X Se 1−x) 6 Crystals 258 References 259 8 Ultrasonic and Piezoelectric Studies of Phase Transitions in Two-Dimensional CuInP 2 S 6 -Type Crystals 263 8.1 Ultrasonic Investigation of Phase Transition in CuInP 2 S 6 Crystals 263 8.2 Piezoelectric and Ultrasonic Investigations of Mixed (Ag,Cu)InP 2 (S,Se) 6 Layered Crystals 265 8.3 Ultrasonic Spectroscopy of Quasi Two-dimensional Cuinp 2 (se X S 1−x) 6 Mixed Crystals 268 8.4 Piezoelectric and Elastic Properties of Layered Materials of Cu(In,Cr)P 2 (S,Se) 6 System 270 References 272 9 Nano Scale Investigations, Domain Structure, and Switching Processes of Low-Dimensional Ferroelectric Layered Chalcogenides 275 9.1 Ferrielectric State in Few Layer or Monolayer CuInP 2 S 6 Samples 275 9.2 Bright Domain Walls in CuInP 2 Se 6 Crystals 283 9.3 Antisite Defects in Layered Multiferroic CuCr 0.9 In 0.1 P 2 S 6 287 References 291 10 Phenomenological Description of Soft Phonon Spectra, Phase Diagrams, and Domain Morphology of Low-Dimensional Ferroelectric Layered Chalcogenides 295 10.1 Brief Overview 295 10.2 Spatially Modulated Incommensurate Phases and Soft Phonon Dispersion in Ferroelectric Layered Chalcogenides 296 10.2.1 Landau–Ginzburg–Devonshire-Free Energy Functional and Lagrange Function 297 10.2.2 The Stability of Spatially Modulated Phases in Ferroelectric Chalcogenides 301 10.2.3 Analytical Description of the Soft Phonon Dispersion 302 10.2.4 Analysis of the Critical Points in the Soft Phonon Spectra 305 10.2.5 The Behavior of Soft Acoustic Phonons in the Vicinity of Critical Wave Vectors 306 10.2.6 Elastic Softening of the Sound Velocity 307 10.2.7 Soft Phonon Dispersion in Ferroelectric Chalcogenides: Comparison with Experiment 308 10.2.8 Temperature Dependence of Static Dielectric Susceptibility 309 10.3 Phase Diagrams with Incommensurate Phases and Domain Splitting in Thin Films of Ferroelectric Layered Chalcogenides 311 10.3.1 Approximate Analytical Solution of the Linearized Euler–Lagrange Equations 313 10.3.2 Phase Equilibrium and Domain Structure Temperature Evolution 314 10.4 Phenomenological Description of Phase Diagrams and Complex Domain Morphology of Ferroelectric Layered Chalcogenide Nanoparticles 317 10.4.1 Reconstruction of CIPS Thermodynamic Potential from Experiments 318 10.4.2 Temperature-Stress Phase Diagrams of Bulk CuInP 2 S 6 319 10.4.3 The Stress-Induced Phase Transitions in CuInP 2 S 6 Nanoparticles of Different Shapes 322 10.4.4 Labyrinthine Domains in CIPS Nanoparticles 325 10.4.5 Analytical Description of Complex Domain Morphology in Ferroelectric Layered Chalcogenide Nanoparticles 327 10.5 Phenomenological Description of Bright-Contrast and Dark-Contrast Domain Walls in Ferroelectric–Antiferroelectric Layered Chalcogenides 332 10.5.1 LGD–FSM Approach 332 10.5.2 Phase Diagrams of the Order Parameters 335 10.5.3 Bright and Dark Domain Walls 337 10.5.4 Comparison with Experiment 339 10.6 Conclusions 341 10. A Appendix A: Analytical Expressions for the Soft Phonon Frequency 342 10. B Appendix B: Soft Acoustic Mode Behavior in the Vicinity of Critical Wave Vectors 345 10. C Appendix C: Temperature Dependence of the Static Dielectric Susceptibility 346 10. D Appendix D: Derivation of PE-SDFE Transition Temperature for Spherical Nanoparticles 347 10. E Appendix E: Derivation of PE-PDFE Transition Temperature for Spherical Nanoparticles 349 References 352 11 Application Examples of Ferroelectric 2D Layered Indium Copper Thiophosphate Chalcogenide, CuInP 2 S 6 359 11.1 The Ferroelectric (FE) Family of Metal (M) Hypo(tio/seleno)diphosphates 359 11.2 Piezoelectric and Pyroelectric Activity and Electrocaloric Effectivity of CuInP 2 S 6 Nanoflakes 360 11.2.1 Piezoactivity of CuInP 2 S 6 Nanoflakes 360 11.2.2 Pyroactivity of CuInP 2 S 6 Nanoflakes 360 11.2.3 Electrocaloric Performances of CuInP 2 S 6 Nanoflakes 361 11.3 Promises of 2D Layered CuInP 2 S 6 for Ferroelectric Field Effect Transistors and Memory Applications 361 11.3.1 Theoretical Considerations and Evaluations 362 11.3.2 Experimental Investigations and Propositions 362 11.3.3 Negative Capacitance Field Effect Transistors Based on Two-Dimensional van der Waals Heterostructures 364 11.4 Conclusions 365 References 366 Index 371
£999.99
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH High-Entropy Materials: From Basics to
Book SynopsisHigh-Entropy Materials Significant update of knowledge in the field of high-entropy materials, including promising new high-entropy ceramics High-Entropy Materials provides information on state-of-the-art development in the field of high-entropy materials, including high-entropy alloys, high-entropy ceramics, and a variety of their applications, covering many core topics to provide a thorough and detailed overview of the subject. The book also thoroughly explores the applications of high-entropy materials in various areas, such as EBC/TBC coating, superhard and wear resistance coating, nuclear energy, batteries, catalysts, thermoelectric, supercapacitors, biocompatible structure, and microelectronics. In High-Entropy Materials, readers can expect to find specific information on: Basics of high entropy materials, structural features and thermodynamics of high-entropy materials, and theoretical design in high-entropy materials Synthesis and processing of high-entropy materials and characterization of high-entropy materials, as well as their mechanical and functional properties Challenges and future directions of high-entropy materials, a relatively new type of material that has been in development only since the early 2000s How high-entropy materials are a horizon-broadening class of materials that can significantly further humanity’s pursuit of progress Focusing on the fundamentals and developments of high-entropy alloys and ceramics as well as on their microstructure and properties for a wide range of applications, High-Entropy Materials is an essential resource on the subject for materials scientists, metallurgists, mechanical engineers, and professionals in the aerospace industries.Table of Contents1. Concept of high-entropy materials 2. Structural feature and thermodynamics of high- entropy materials 3. Theoretical design in high-entropy materials 4. Synthesis and processing of high-entropy materials 5. Characterization of high-entropy materials 6. Mechanical properties 7. Functional properties 8. Applications of high-entropy materials 9. Challenges and future directions of high-entropy materials
£999.99
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Biotechnology in Environmental Remediation
Book SynopsisA timely overview of techniques for involving biological organisms in the remediation of polluted ecosystems As a result of worldwide industry, urbanization, and population growth, many harmful organic and inorganic pollutants have been introduced into the environment. With bioremediation, we can use fungi, bacteria, and plants—along with their secondary metabolites—to clean up areas that have been affected by industrial and commercial activities. Biotechnology in Environmental Remediation presents a thorough consideration of the most important biologically-based remediation methods in use today. Environmental biotechnology is a more sustainable alternative to chemical and mechanical remediation methods, which explains the rapidly growing popularity of these techniques. This edited volume summarizes our current understanding of bioremediation approaches and presents research outcomes from a diverse selection of geographies and ecosystems. Chapters cover remediation techniques for pollutants affecting soil, water, air, and sediments, as well as tools for addressing these issues, including tools for assessment and monitoring. Uniquely, Biotechnology in Environmental Remediation emphasizes the latest findings on the use of secondary metabolites in bioremediation. Other topics covered include chemical sustainability, nanotechnology, and biofuels. Readers will gain an understanding of issues including: How biological organisms and their secondary metabolites are currently being used in environmental remediation projects worldwide New applications for phytomolecules, lichens, nanoparticles, rhizobacteria, and other technologies, as well as future directions for bioremediation The steps in the process of biotechnology-driven remediation, including detection, investigation, assessment, cleanup, redevelopment, and monitoring Remediation of petroleum hydrocarbons, algal carbon sequestration, wastewater management, and the role of fatty acid and proteins in remediation The investigations in this book provide important knowledge for researchers in biotechnology, ecology, environmental science, and related disciplines. Additionally, policymakers and NGOs with an interest in remediating environmental contaminants will gain valuable context. Biotechnology in Environmental Remediation is a foundation for future research on biotechnological interventions for a clean planet.Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Biotechnology and Various Environmental Concerns: An Introduction 1Ravi K. Gangwar, Rajesh Bajpai, and Jaspal Singh 1.1 Introduction 1 References 7 2 Plant Biotechnology: Its Importance, Contribution to Agriculture and Environment, and Its Future Prospects 9Jeny Jose and Csaba Éva 2.1 Where do Environment and Biotechnology Meet? 9 2.2 Understanding Agricultural Biotechnology 11 2.3 Animal and Plant Biotechnology 13 3 Recent Advances in the Remediation of Petroleum Hydrocarbon Contamination with Microbes 31Parvaze A. Wani and Salami O. Rahman 3.1 Introduction 31 3.2 Sources of Petroleum Hydrocarbons 32 3.3 Composition of Petroleum Pollutants 32 3.4 Toxic Effects of Petroleum Hydrocarbons 33 3.5 Hydrocarbon-Degrading Microorganisms 34 3.6 Mechanism of Petroleum Hydrocarbon Degradation 36 3.7 Types of Hydrocarbon Degradation 38 3.8 Factors Affecting Hydrocarbon Degradation by Microorganisms 39 3.9 Conclusion 41 4 Remediation of Heavy Metals: Tools and Techniques 47Ankita Singh and Amit Kumar Tripathi 4.1 Introduction 47 4.2 Bioremediation 48 4.3 Organism of Bioremediation 49 4.4 Techniques of Bioremediation 51 4.5 Types of Bioremediation 52 4.6 Prospects of Bioremediation 56 4.7 Advantages and Disadvantages of Bioremediation 57 4.8 Conclusion 59 5 Soil Biodiversity and Environmental Sustainability 69Tsedekech G. Weldmichael 5.1 Introduction 69 5.2 Importance of Soil Biodiversity in Supporting Terrestrial Life and Diversity 71 5.3 Soil Biodiversity and Climate Change 75 5.4 Soil Biodiversity and Hydrological Cycle 77 5.5 Soil Biodiversity and Environmental Remediation 79 5.6 Conclusion 80 6 Plant Growth-Promoting Rhizobacteria: Role, Applications, and Biotechnology 89Induja Mishra, Pashupati Nath, Namita Joshi, and Bishwambhar D. Joshi 6.1 Introduction 89 6.2 Functions and Role of PGPR 90 6.3 Range and Different Diversity of PGPR 91 6.4 Mechanisms of Plant Growth Promotion by PGPR 94 6.5 Biotechnological Effects of PGPR 95 6.6 PGPR Cometabolism 100 6.7 Classification and Assortment of PGPR Strains 101 6.8 Commercial Significance of PGPR 101 6.9 Future Prospects of PGPR 102 6.10 Concluding Remarks of PGPR 103 7 A Green Approach for CO2 Fixation Using Microalgae Adsorption: Biotechnological Approach 115Priyanka Raviraj and Syed Atif Ali 7.1 Introduction 115 7.2 Effect of CO2 Emissions on Environment 116 7.3 Advanced CO2-Capturing Methods 117 7.4 Biological Methods for CO2 Capturing 118 7.5 Earlier Technologies of Carbon Dioxide Capturing 119 7.6 Natural Carbon Capture Technology: Photosynthesis 120 7.7 Microalgae as the Modern Tool to Capture CO2 121 7.8 Biology of Microalgae as Photosynthetic Organisms and CO2 Absorbers 122 7.9 Conclusion 123 8 Assessment of In-Vitro Culture as a Sustainable and Eco-friendly Approach of Propagating Lichens and Their Constituent Organisms for Bioprospecting Applications 129Amrita Kumari, Himani Joshi, Ankita H. Tripathi, Garima Chand, Penny Joshi, Lalit M. Tewari, Yogesh Joshi, Dalip K. Upreti, Rajesh Bajpai, and Santosh K. Upadhyay 8.1 Lichens and Their Structural Organization 129 8.2 Lichens and Bioprospection 131 8.3 Lichens as Sources of Unique Metabolites 132 8.4 Need of In Vitro Culture of Lichen and Lichen Components and Its Utility in Environment Conservation 134 8.5 In Vitro Culture of Lichens/Constituent Organisms 135 8.6 Use of In Vitro Lichen Culture for Bioprospecting 139 8.7 Challenges Associated 145 8.8 Conclusion 145 9 Bioprospection Potential of Indian Cladoniaceae Together with Its Distribution, Habitat Preference, and Biotechnological Prospects 155Rajesh Bajpai, Upasana Pandey, Brahma N. Singh, Veena Pande, Chandra P. Singh, and Dalip K. Upreti 9.1 Introduction 155 9.2 Materials and Methods 159 9.3 Results and Discussion 160 9.4 Conclusions 182 10 Biotechnological Approach for the Wastewater Management 193Anamika Agrawal, Sameer Chandra, Anand K. Gupta, Rajendra Singh, and Jaspal Singh 10.1 Introduction 193 10.2 Effects ofWater Pollution 195 10.3 Role of Biotechnology to ControlWater Pollution 196 10.4 Role of Biotechnology in Phytoremediation 205 10.5 Conclusion 207 11 The Application of Biotechnology in the Realm of Bioenergy and Biofuels 209Manvi Singh, Namira Arif, and Anil Bhatia 11.1 Introduction 209 11.2 Bioenergy (Biomass Energy) 210 11.3 Conclusions 217 12 Nanotechnological Approach for the Abatement of Environmental Pollution: A Way Forward Toward a Clean Environment 221Manzari Kushwaha, Anuradha Mishra, Divya Goel, and Shiv Shankar 12.1 Introduction 221 12.2 Nanoparticles: Properties, Types, and Route of Synthesis 222 12.3 Nanoremediation for Environment Cleanup 227 12.4 Challenges in Nanoremediation of the Environment and Solution 236 12.5 Conclusion and Future Prospects 238 13 Role of Fatty Acids and Proteins in Alteration of Microbial Cell Surface Hydrophobicity: A Regulatory Factor of Environmental Biodegradation 249Babita Kumari, Kriti Kriti, and Gayatri Singh 13.1 Introduction 249 13.2 Cell Surface Fatty Acids and Alteration in CSH 250 13.3 Proteins/Genes Responsible in CSH Modulation 253 13.4 Eicosapentaenoic Acid (EPA) 256 13.5 Factors that Influence Cell Surface Hydrophobicity 257 13.6 Conclusion 260 14 Chemical Sustainability for a Nontoxic Environment -- A Healthy Future 269Puneet Khare, Shashi K. Tiwari, and Lakshmi Bala 14.1 Introduction 269 14.2 Basis of Sustainable Chemistry 271 14.3 Challenges in Front of Sustainable Chemistry 272 14.4 Green Chemistry: A Sustainable Approach at a Minor Level 273 14.5 Research and Education in Green and Sustainable Chemistry 274 14.6 Scope of the Concerned Field 274 14.7 Role of OECD Toward Sustainable Chemistry 275 14.8 Difference Between Green and Sustainable Chemistry 275 14.9 The 12 Principles of Green Chemistry (EPA) 276 14.10 Applications and Innovations of Sustainable Chemistry 277 14.11 In the Pharmaceutical Industry 277 14.12 Intense Use of Renewable Resources 278 14.13 Improvement in Catalytic Methods 278 14.14 Encouragement of the Use of Biomass 278 14.15 Improvement of Lignocellulose Extraction Technology 278 14.16 Improvement in Solvents 278 14.17 Biocatalyst Advancement 279 14.18 Improvement in Plastic Technology 279 14.19 Techniques for Assessing Environmentally Friendly Chemical Processes and Products 280 14.20 R&D in Sustainable Chemical Fields 280 14.21 Benefits of Sustainable Chemistry 280 14.22 Conclusion 281 Acknowledgment 281 References 281 Index 285
£97.75
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Pyroelectric Materials: Physics and Applications
Book SynopsisPyroelectric Materials An authoritative and practical discussion of pyroelectric materials and their applications In Pyroelectric Materials: Physics and Applications, the authors deliver a comprehensive exploration of the physics of pyroelectric materials and their applications. With authoritative coverage of a wide variety of critical topics in the field, the authors provide the readers with chapters on dielectric fundamentals, pyroelectricity, pyroelectric materials and their applications such as pyroelectric infrared detectors, pyroelectric energy harvesting, and pyroelectric fusion. Readers will also find: A thorough introduction to the fundamentals of dielectrics, including discussions of polarization, dispersion, relaxation, and the molecular theory of induced charges in a dielectric Comprehensive explorations of pyroelectricity, including its history, theory, and a simple model of pyroelectric effect Perfect for researchers and professionals with an interest in pyroelectric materials, the book is also useful for graduate students taking courses involving pyroelectric materials and their applications.Table of Contents1 Fundamentals of Dielectrics 1.1 Dielectrics 1.1.1 Polarization of Dielectrics 1.1.2 Dispersion of Dielectric Polarization 1.1.2.1 Electronic Polarization 1.1.2.2 Ionic Polarization 1.1.2.3 Orientation Polarization 1.1.2.4 Space Charge Polarization 1.1.3 Dielectric relaxation 1.1.4 Debye relaxation 1.1.5 Molecular Theory of Induced Charges in a Dielectric 1.1.6: Capacitance of a Parallel Plate Capacitor 1.1.7 Electric displacement field, Dielectric constant, and Electric susceptibility 1.1.8 Local Field in a Dielectric 1.1.8.1 Lorentz field, E2 1.1.8.2 Field of dipoles inside cavity, E3 1.1.9 Dielectrics Losses 1.1.9.1 Dielectric Loss Angle 1.1.9.2 Total and Specific Dielectric Losses 1.1.10: Dielectrics Breakdown 2 Pyroelectricity 2.1 Introduction 2.2 History of pyroelectricity 2.3 Theory of Pyroelectricity 2.4 Simple model of pyroelectric effect 2.5 Pyroelectric crystal symmetry 2.6 Piezoelectricity 2.7 Ferroelectricity 2.7.1 Ferroelectric Phase Transitions 2.7.2 Ferroelectric Domains 2.7.3 Ferroelectric Domain Wall Motion 2.7.4 Soft mode 3 Pyroelectric materials and Applications 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Theory of Pyroelectric Detectors 3.3 Material Figure-of-Merits 3.4 Classification of pyroelectric materials 3.4.1 Single crystals 3.4.1.1 Triglycine sulphate (TGS) 3.4.1.2 Lithium tantalate (LT) and Lithium niobate (LN) 3.4.1.3 Barium strontium titanate (BST) 3.4.1.4 Strontium barium niobite (SBN) 3.4.2 Perovskite Ceramics 3.4.2.1 Modified lead zirconate (PZ) 3.4.2.2 Modified lead titanate (PT) 3.4.3 Polymers 3.4.4 Ceramic-polymer composites 3.4.5 Lead-free ceramics 3.4.6 Other pyroelectric materials 3.4.6.1 Aluminium nitride (AlN) 3.4.6.2 Gallium nitride (GaN) 3.4.6.3 Zinc oxide (ZnO) 4 Pyroelectric Infrared Detectors 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Device configurations 4.2.1 Thick film detectors 4.2.2 Thin film detectors 4.2.3 Hybrid focal plane array detector 4.2.4 Linear array detector 4.2.5 Periodic domain TFLTTM detector 4.2.6 Terahertz thermal detector 4.2.7 PVDF polymer detector 4.2.8 TFP polymer detector 4.2.9 TADPh polymer detector 4.2.10 Integrated resonant absorber pyroelectric detector 4.2.11 Resonant IR detector 4.2.12: Plasmonic IR detector 4.2.13: Graphene pyroelectric bolometer 5 Pyroelectric Energy Harvesting 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Theory of Pyroelectric Energy harvesting 5.3 Pyroelectricity in Ferroelectric Materials 5.3.1 Thermodynamic Cycles of PyEH 5.3.1 (a) Carnot Cycle 5.3.1 (b) Ericsson Cycle 5.3.1 (c) Olsen Cycle 5.4 Pyroelectric Generators 5.5 Pyroelectric Nanogenerators 5.5.1 Polymer Based Pyroelectric Nanogenerators 5.5.1.1 PyNGs Driven by Various Environmental Conditions 5.5.1.2 Development of Pyroelectric Materials 5.5.1.3 Wearable Pyroelectric Nanogenerators 5.5.1.4 Hybrid Pyroelectric Nanogenerators 5.5.2 Ceramic Based Pyroelectric Nanogenerators 5.5.2.1 ZnO based pyroelectric Nanogenerators 5.5.2.2 PZT based pyroelectric Nanogenerators 5.5.2.3 Lead-free Ceramic based pyroelectric Nanogenerators 5.5.3 Thermal nanophotonic- pyroelectric nanogenerator 5.5.4 Challenges and Perspectives of Pyroelectric nanogenerators 6 Pyroelectric fusion 6.1 Introduction 6.2 History of Pyroelectric Fusion 6.3 Pyroelectric neutron generators 6.4 Pyroelectric X-ray generators
£999.99
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Grundlagen der Konstruktionswerkstoffe für
Book SynopsisGrundlagen der Konstruktionswerkstoffe für Studium und Praxis Der anwendungsorientierte Einstieg in die Welt der Konstruktionswerkstoffe für Studierende des Maschinenbaus und der Werkstoffwissenschaften! Viele Studierende nehmen die Werkstoffkunde anfangs als sehr trockene Disziplin wahr. Dabei ist die Welt der Werkstoffe eine überaus faszinierende. Die profunde Kenntnis von Struktur und Eigenschaften der Werkstoffe öffnet Türen zum Einstieg in High-Tech-Branchen wie Maschinenbau, Lasertechnik und Photonik, Medizintechnik, erneuerbare Energien, Präzisionsmechanik, Luft- und Raumfahrt oder Mikro- und Nanotechnologie. Mit seinem Fokus auf Konstruktionswerkstoffe richtet sich das Lehrbuch an angehende Ingenieurinnen und Ingenieure der Fachrichtungen Maschinenbau und Werkstoffwissenschaften. Dabei werden die Grundlagen ausführlich dargestellt und stets mit Bezügen zu Praxisanwendungen flankiert. Der Inhalt deckt alle fürs Studium relevanten Themen ab: Metallkunde, Legierungskunde, das Eisen-Kohlenstoff-Diagramm, Werkstoffprüfung, Korrosion, Oberflächentechnik und die Werkstoffe Stahl, Eisengusswerkstoffe, Aluminium und andere Nichteisenmetalle, Keramik und Glas sowie Polymere. Anschaulich: mehr als 400 farbige Abbildungen und Illustrationen erhöhen die Übersichtlichkeit und den Spaß am Lernen Hilft bei der Prüfungsvorbereitung: Kapitelzusammenfassungen und zahlreiche Aufgaben mit Lösungen im Anhang Motivierend: der Praxisbezug zu modernen Anwendungen aus High-Tech-Industrien sorgt für Aha-Effekte und stärkt das Durchhaltevermögen bei der Durchdringung des LernstoffsTable of ContentsVorwort xv Danksagung xvii 1 Metallkunde 1 1.1 Wichtige Kristallstrukturen von Metallen 2 1.1.1 Miller’sche Indizes: Bezeichnung von Richtungen und Ebenen 3 1.1.2 Packungsdichte und dicht gepackte Ebenen in Metallen 6 1.1.3 Polymorphie: Die Vielgestalt einiger Metalle 8 1.2 Kristallbaudefekte in realen Metallstrukturen 9 1.2.1 0D: punktförmige Defekte 10 1.2.2 1D: Versetzungen 11 1.2.3 2D: Korngrenzen und andere Flächendefekte 12 1.2.4 3D: Ausscheidungen 13 1.3 Tropie: Die Richtungsabhängigkeit der Eigenschaften 14 1.4 Linear-elastische Verformung 16 1.4.1 Linear-elastische Verformung isotroper Werkstoffe 16 1.4.2 Vertiefung: linear-elastische Tensoren für isotrope Werkstoffe 19 1.4.3 Vertiefung: linear-elastische Tensoren und Anisotropiefaktor für kubische Einkristalle 22 1.5 Plastische Verformung der Metalle 23 1.5.1 Vereinfachte Betrachtung der plastischen Verformung 23 1.5.2 Vertiefende Betrachtung der plastischen Verformung 24 1.5.3 Zusammenhang zwischen Kristallstruktur und plastischer Verformbarkeit 31 1.6 Verfestigung von Metallen durch Kristallbaudefekte 31 1.6.1 0D: Mischkristallverfestigung 31 1.6.2 1D: Kaltverfestigung 33 1.6.3 2D: Feinkornverfestigung 34 1.6.4 3D: Ausscheidungshärtung 34 1.7 Aufgaben 35 Zusammenfassung 36 2 Legierungskunde 39 2.1 Erstarrungsverhalten von Metallschmelzen 39 2.2 Homogene oder heterogene Gefüge 41 2.3 Legierungen 42 2.3.1 Homogene Legierungen aus Mischkristallen 42 2.3.2 Heterogene Legierungen aus Kristallgemischen 43 2.3.3 Legierungen mit intermetallischen oder intermediären Phasen 44 2.4 Zweistoffsysteme (Auswahl) 45 2.4.1 Zweistoffsystem mit vollständiger Löslichkeit 45 2.4.2 Eutektisches Zweistoffsystem mit begrenzter Löslichkeit 48 2.4.3 Eutektisches Zweistoffsystem Aluminium-Silizium 55 2.4.4 Zweistoffsysteme mit intermetallischen Phasen 57 2.5 Aufgaben 58 Zusammenfassung 60 3 Das Eisen-Kohlenstoff-Diagramm (metastabiles EKD) 61 3.1 Das metastabile Zweistoffsystem Eisen-Kohlenstoff 61 3.2 Hebelgesetz und Gefügeentstehung im metastabilen EKD 64 3.3 Ausblick auf die Kapitel Stahl und Eisengusswerkstoffe (Kap. 7 bis 10) 68 3.4 Aufgaben 68 Zusammenfassung 69 4 Werkstoffprüfung 71 4.1 Methoden der Werkstoffprüfung zur Ermittlung mechanischer Kennwerte 71 4.1.1 Technische Spannung und technische Dehnung 71 4.1.2 Zugversuch 73 4.1.3 Härteprüfung 83 4.1.4 Biegeversuch 86 4.1.5 Torsionsversuch 88 4.1.6 Dynamische Werkstoffprüfung – Dauerschwingversuch nach Wöhler 90 4.1.7 Kerbschlagbiegeversuch und Zähigkeit 95 4.1.8 Zeitstandversuch: Kriechen und Relaxation 99 4.1.9 Weitere technologische Versuche 102 4.2 Verfahren der Rissprüfung 102 4.2.1 Durchstrahlungsprüfung 103 4.2.2 Ultraschallrissprüfung 103 4.2.3 Magnetpulverprüfung 104 4.2.4 Wirbelstromprüfung 105 4.2.5 Farbeindringprüfung 105 4.3 Mikroskopische Mess- und Prüfverfahren 105 4.3.1 Stereomikroskop 105 4.3.2 Konfokale Lasermikroskopie 105 4.4 Methoden der Analyse von Struktur und Gefüge 106 4.4.1 Strukturanalyse durch Röntgenbeugung (XRD) 106 4.4.2 Metallographische Lichtmikroskopie 107 4.4.3 Rasterelektronenmikroskopie (REM) 108 4.4.4 Transmissionselektronenmikroskopie (TEM) 109 4.4.5 Computertomographie: der Röntgenblick ins Material 109 4.5 Analyse der chemischen Zusammensetzung 111 4.5.1 Röntgenfluoreszenzanalyse (RFA) 111 4.5.2 EDX und WDX 113 4.5.3 Photoelektronenspektroskopie (XPS) 114 4.5.4 Auger-Elektronenspektroskopie 116 4.5.5 Funkenspektrometrie (OES, optische Emissionsspektrometrie) 116 4.5.6 Massenspektrometer 116 4.5.7 Nasschemische Analyse 117 4.5.8 Infrarotspektroskopie (FTIR) 117 4.6 Aufgaben 118 Zusammenfassung 120 5 Korrosion 123 5.1 Grundlagen der Korrosion 123 5.1.1 Elektrochemische Standardpotentiale 123 5.1.2 Galvanische Zelle 126 5.1.3 Sauerstoff- oder Wasserstoffkorrosion? 128 5.1.4 Sauerstoffkorrosion 128 5.1.5 Wasserstoffkorrosion 129 5.1.6 Sonderfall Passivierung 129 5.1.7 Flächenregel 130 5.2 Erscheinungsformen der Korrosion in der Praxis 131 5.2.1 Gleichmäßige Flächenkorrosion 131 5.2.2 Kontaktkorrosion und selektive Korrosion 132 5.2.3 Interkristalline Korrosion 133 5.2.4 Lochfraßkorrosion 134 5.2.5 Rostfreier Edelstahl: Lochfraßpotential und PREN-Nummer 136 5.2.6 Spaltkorrosion und Belüftungselement 140 5.2.7 Spannungsrisskorrosion 142 5.2.8 Korrosionsrisiko Umformmartensit im austenitischen rostfreien Edelstahl 143 5.3 Korrosionsschutz 144 5.3.1 Passiver Korrosionsschutz 144 5.3.2 Aktiver Korrosionsschutz 144 5.4 Mess- und Prüfverfahren für Korrosion 145 5.4.1 Salzsprühtest 145 5.4.2 Test auf interkristalline Korrosionsanfälligkeit (IK-Test) 146 5.4.3 Stromdichte-Potentialkurven (Lochfraßpotentialmessungen) 146 5.4.4 Chemische Analyse der Korrosionsprodukte 148 5.5 Aufgaben 148 Zusammenfassung 149 6 Oberflächentechnik 151 6.1 Grundlagen der Tribologie 151 6.1.1 Reibung 151 6.1.2 Schmierung 152 6.1.3 Verschleiß 154 6.2 Oberflächenbehandlungen 155 6.2.1 Mechanische Verfahren 155 6.2.2 Thermische Randschichtverfahren 156 6.2.3 Reinigen und Entfetten 156 6.2.4 Oberflächenaktivierung 157 6.2.5 Haftvermittler 157 6.3 Chemische Umwandlungsschichten 159 6.3.1 Beizen und Passivieren von rostfreiem Edelstahl 159 6.3.2 Phosphatieren von Stahl 160 6.3.3 Brünieren von Stahl 160 6.3.4 Chromatieren von Aluminium, Magnesium und Zink 161 6.3.5 Anodisieren von Aluminium 162 6.3.6 Anodisieren von Titan 165 6.4 Oberflächenbeschichtungen 165 6.4.1 Lackieren 165 6.4.2 Galvanisieren 168 6.4.3 Chemisch Nickel oder chemisch Kupfer 172 6.4.4 Metallisieren von Kunststoffen 173 6.4.5 Feuerbeschichtungen, Lamellenbeschichtung und Plattieren 174 6.4.6 Thermisches Spritzen 174 6.4.7 Emaillieren 177 6.4.8 Sol-Gel-Technologie 179 6.4.9 Dünnschichttechnologien PVD und CVD 180 6.5 Aufgaben 182 Zusammenfassung 183 7 Stahl: Technologie und Wärmebehandlung 185 7.1 Stahltechnologie 186 7.1.1 Hochofenprozess und Linz-Donawitz-Verfahren 186 7.1.2 Direktreduktionsprozess und Elektrostahlverfahren 187 7.1.3 Sekundärmetallurgie und Weiterverarbeitung des Stahls 189 7.1.4 Stahlerzeugnisse 191 7.2 Wärmebehandlung: Glühen von Stahl 195 7.2.1 Homogenisierungsglühen, Lösungsglühen, Blankglühen 196 7.2.2 Grobkornglühen 197 7.2.3 Normalglühen 197 7.2.4 Weichglühen 198 7.2.5 Rekristallisationsglühen 198 7.2.6 Spannungsarmglühen 200 7.3 Wärmebehandlung: Härten und Vergüten von Stahl 200 7.3.1 Martensitisches Härten 200 7.3.2 Anlassvergüten 202 7.3.3 Bainitisches Vergüten 204 7.3.4 Patentieren 205 7.3.5 Zeit-Temperatur-Umwandlungsschaubild (ZTU-Diagramm) 206 7.4 Wärmebehandlung: Ausscheidungshärtung von Spezialstählen 210 7.4.1 Kohärente Ausscheidungen in martensitaushärtenden Stählen (Maraging und PH-Stähle) 210 7.4.2 Sekundärhärtung durch Carbide und Nitride beim Anlassen 212 7.5 Wärmebehandlung: Härten der Oberfläche 212 7.5.1 Randschichthärten ohne thermochemische Diffusion 212 7.5.2 Verfahren mit thermochemischer Diffusion und martensitischer Randschichthärtung 215 7.5.3 Verfahren mit thermochemischer Diffusion ohne martensitische Randschichthärtung 217 7.5.4 Bestimmung der Einhärtetiefe (Härteverlaufskurve) 221 7.6 Wärmebehandlung: praktische Hinweise 222 7.7 Schweißeignung der Stähle 223 7.8 Aufgaben 224 Zusammenfassung 225 8 Stahl: Güteklassen, Kurznamen und Werkstoffnummern 227 8.1 Einteilung in Güteklassen 227 8.2 Kurznamen und Werkstoffnummern für Stahl 229 8.2.1 Kurznamen nach Verwendungszweck und mechanischen oder physikalischen Eigenschaften 229 8.2.2 Kurznamen nach chemischer Zusammensetzung 232 8.2.3 Internationale Werkstoffnummern 235 8.3 Aufgaben 239 Zusammenfassung 239 9 Stahl: Ausgewählte Sorten und Anwendungen 241 9.1 Stahlsorten für den Stahlbau 241 9.1.1 Unlegierte Baustähle und Maschinenbaustähle 241 9.1.2 Mikrolegierte Feinkornbaustähle mit erhöhter Festigkeit und Zähigkeit 243 9.1.3 Wetterfeste Baustähle 246 9.1.4 Flacherzeugnisse für das Kaltumformen 247 9.1.5 Flacherzeugnisse mit erhöhter Festigkeit für den Leichtbau von Automobilen 248 9.2 Spezielle Stahlsorten für den Maschinen- und Stahlbau 252 9.2.1 Kaltfließpressstähle (Kaltstauchstähle) 252 9.2.2 Automatenstähle für die spanende Bearbeitung 252 9.2.3 Einsatzstähle 254 9.2.4 Nitrierstähle 255 9.2.5 Vergütungsstähle 256 9.2.6 Federstähle 260 9.2.7 Verschleißfeste Wälzlagerstähle und Hartmanganstahl 263 9.2.8 Druckwasserstoffbeständige Stähle 265 9.2.9 Martensitaushärtende (Maraging-)Stähle mit höchster Festigkeit 265 9.2.10 Kaltzähe Stähle für tiefe Temperaturen 267 9.2.11 Warmfeste Stähle für hohe Temperaturen 268 9.3 Nichtrostende Stähle 271 9.3.1 Rostfreie ferritische Stähle 272 9.3.2 Rostfreie martensitische Stähle 273 9.3.3 Rostfreie nickelmartensitische und PH-Stähle 275 9.3.4 Rostfreie austenitische und superaustenitische Stähle 276 9.3.5 Rostfreie Duplex-undSuperduplexstähle 278 9.3.6 Festigkeit, Korrosionsbeständigkeit und typische Anwendungen rostfreier Stähle 279 9.4 Nichtrostende hitzebeständige Stähle 281 9.5 Stähle mit besonderen physikalischen Eigenschaften 283 9.5.1 Nichtrostende nichtmagnetisierbare Stähle 283 9.5.2 Elektrobleche 284 9.6 Stahlsorten für Werkzeuge 284 9.6.1 Unlegierte Werkzeugstähle 285 9.6.2 Legierte Kaltarbeitsstähle 285 9.6.3 Warmarbeitsstähle 288 9.6.4 Schnellarbeitsstähle 289 9.7 Aufgaben 292 Zusammenfassung 293 10 Eisengusswerkstoffe 295 10.1 Stahlguss 297 10.2 Herstellung von Gusseisen 299 10.3 Entstehung des Gefüges von Gusseisen 299 10.3.1 Eutektische Reaktion: Graues und weißes Gusseisen 299 10.3.2 Eutektoide Reaktion: Perlitische oder ferritische Matrix 300 10.3.3 Ferritische Matrix durch Perlitzerfall 300 10.4 Graues Gusseisen: Wichtigster Eisengusswerkstoff 302 10.4.1 Gusseisen mit Lamellengraphit (GJL) 302 10.4.2 Gusseisen mit Kugelgraphit (GJS) 305 10.4.3 Gusseisen mit Vermikulargraphit (GJV) 308 10.4.4 Sondergusseisen: korrosionsbeständiger austenitischer Grauguss (GJLA und GJSA) 308 10.4.5 Sondergusseisen: GJS-SiMo für hohe Temperaturen 309 10.4.6 Sondergusseisen: Ausferritisch vergütetes („bainitisches“) Gusseisen 309 10.5 Weißes Gusseisen 310 10.5.1 Perlitischer Hartguss (GJN) 310 10.5.2 Temperguss (GJMW und GJMB) 311 10.5.3 Sondergusseisen – verschleißfester perlitischer Hartguss 311 10.6 Kennzeichnung und Anwendungen von Gusseisen 311 10.7 Aufgaben 315 Zusammenfassung 316 11 Aluminium 317 11.1 Gewinnung von Aluminium 317 11.2 Nachhaltiges Aluminiumrecycling 319 11.3 Kennzeichnung und Einteilung der Aluminiumwerkstoffe 319 11.4 Verfestigungsmechanismen in Aluminiumlegierungen 322 11.5 Wärmebehandlung von Aluminiumlegierungen 323 11.5.1 Ausgewählte Glühbehandlungen 323 11.5.2 Ausscheidungshärten hochfester Aluminiumlegierungen 323 11.6 Anwendungen von Aluminium und seinen Legierungen 332 11.6.1 Reinaluminium und seine Anwendungen 332 11.6.2 Aluminiumknetlegierungen und ihre Anwendungen 334 11.6.3 Aluminiumgusslegierungen und ihre Anwendungen 338 11.7 Oberflächenbehandlungen 344 11.8 Aufgaben 344 Zusammenfassung 346 12 Andere Nichteisenmetalle 347 12.1 Titan 347 12.1.1 Arten und Anwendungen von Titanlegierungen 347 12.1.2 Fallstudie Anwendungen Titan in der Luftfahrt: Kampfjet 351 12.1.3 Fallstudie Anwendungen Titan in der Medizintechnik: Dentalimplantate 352 12.2 Magnesium 354 12.3 Nickel 355 12.3.1 Korrosionsbeständige Monellegierungen 355 12.3.2 Hochtemperaturfeste Nickelbasissuperlegierungen 356 12.3.3 Fallstudie einkristalline Turbinenschaufel 358 12.3.4 Heizleiter 359 12.3.5 Formgedächtnislegierungen 359 12.3.6 Weichmagnetische Nickellegierungen 359 12.4 Cobalt 360 12.5 Kupfer 360 12.5.1 Herstellung von Kupfer 360 12.5.2 Anwendungen von reinem und niedriglegiertem Kupfer 361 12.5.3 Anwendungen ausgewählter Kupferlegierungen 364 12.6 Zink 367 12.7 Zinn 367 12.8 Refraktärmetalle: Wolfram, Molybdän, Tantal und Niob 368 12.9 Edelmetalle 371 12.10 Aufgaben 372 Zusammenfassung 373 13 Keramik und Glas 375 13.1 Keramik: Herstellung und Konstruktionsregeln 376 13.2 Umgang mit dem Sprödbruchverhalten von Keramiken 378 13.2.1 Weibull-Festigkeitsverteilung von Keramiken 378 13.2.2 Bruchzähigkeit von Keramiken 379 13.3 Silikatkeramik 381 13.4 Feuerfeste Keramik 382 13.5 Hochleistungskeramik 384 13.5.1 Aluminiumoxid 384 13.5.2 Zirkoniumoxid 386 13.5.3 Siliziumcarbid 389 13.5.4 Siliziumnitrid 390 13.6 Schneidkeramik für die spanende Bearbeitung 391 13.7 Funktionskeramik 394 13.7.1 Piezoelektrische Keramiken 394 13.7.2 Vertiefung piezoelektrische Keramik: Fallstudie hochpräzise Positioniersysteme 397 13.7.3 Ferrimagnetische Keramiken 400 13.7.4 Supraleitende Keramiken 402 13.7.5 Optische Keramiken 402 13.8 Glaskeramik 404 13.9 Glas 405 13.9.1 Herstellung von Glas 406 13.9.2 Quarzglas 407 13.9.3 Kalk-Natron-Glas 408 13.9.4 Borosilikatglas 408 13.9.5 Thermisch und chemisch gehärtete Gläser 408 13.9.6 Verbund- und Sicherheitsgläser 410 13.9.7 Gefärbte Gläser und Überfanggläser 410 13.9.8 Gläser mit Bleioxid 410 13.10 Aufgaben 411 Zusammenfassung 412 14 Kunststoffe 413 14.1 Einteilung der Kunststoffe nach Vernetzungsgrad: Thermoplaste, Elastomere und Duroplaste 415 14.2 Struktur und Eigenschaften thermoplastischer Kunststoffe 415 14.2.1 Monomere als chemische Grundbausteine 415 14.2.2 Entstehung kettenartiger Makromoleküle 416 14.2.3 Primärbindungen in den Molekülketten 416 14.2.4 Sekundärbindungen zwischen den Molekülketten 417 14.2.5 Amorphe und kristalline Bereiche in Kunststoffen 418 14.2.6 Kristalline Bereiche in Flüssigkristallpolymeren 419 14.2.7 Viskoelastisches Verhalten von amorphen und teilkristallinen Kunststoffen 419 14.2.8 Anisotropie beim Strecken der Makromoleküle 421 14.2.9 Lineare und verzweigte Ketten 422 14.2.10 Copolymere zum gezielten Einstellen von Eigenschaften 422 14.2.11 Zusatzstoffe (Additive) und Einfluss auf die Eigenschaften 423 14.3 Thermoplaste und ihre Anwendungen 423 14.3.1 Thermoplastische Massenkunststoffe 424 14.3.2 Thermoplastische Ingenieurkunststoffe 427 14.3.3 Thermoplastische Hochleistungskunststoffe 431 14.4 Elastomere und ihre Anwendungen 433 14.4.1 R-Kautschuke mit ungesättigten Hauptketten 433 14.4.2 M-Kautschuke mit gesättigten Hauptketten 435 14.4.3 Q-Kautschuke (Silikone) 436 14.4.4 U-Kautschuke (Polyurethane) 437 14.4.5 O- und T-Kautschuke 438 14.4.6 Spritzgießbare thermoplastische Elastomere 438 14.5 Duroplaste und ihre Anwendungen 439 14.6 Biokunststoffe 439 14.7 Aufgaben 442 Zusammenfassung 443 15 Werkstoffe, Rohstoffe und Nachhaltigkeit: persönliches Schlusswort 445 15.1 Ressourcenverbrauch und Kreislaufwirtschaft 445 15.2 Rohstoffabbau und Nachhaltigkeit 447 15.3 Verantwortung ist immer persönlich 449 Lösungen 451 Literatur 473 Stichwortverzeichnis 483
£47.50
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Computational Drug Discovery, 2 Volumes: Methods
Book SynopsisComputational Drug Discovery A comprehensive resource that explains a wide array of computational technologies and methods driving innovation in drug discovery Computational Drug Discovery: Methods and Applications (2 volume set) covers a wide range of cutting-edge computational technologies and computational chemistry methods that are transforming drug discovery. The book delves into recent advances, particularly focusing on artificial intelligence (AI) and its application for protein structure prediction, AI-enabled virtual screening, and generative modeling for compound design. Additionally, it covers key technological advancements in computing such as quantum and cloud computing that are driving innovations in drug discovery. Furthermore, dedicated chapters that addresses the recent trends in the field of computer aided drug design, including ultra-large-scale virtual screening for hit identification, computational strategies for designing new therapeutic modalities like PROTACs and covalent inhibitors that target residues beyond cysteine are also presented. To offer the most up-to-date information on computational methods utilized in Computational Drug Discovery, it covers chapters highlighting the use of molecular dynamics and other related methods, application of QM and QM/MM methods in computational drug design, and techniques for navigating and visualizing the chemical space, as well as leveraging big data to drive drug discovery efforts. The book is thoughtfully organized into eight thematic sections, each focusing on a specific computational method or technology applied to drug discovery. Authored by renowned experts from academia, pharmaceutical industry, and major drug discovery software providers, it offers an overview of the latest advances in computational drug discovery. Key topics covered in the book include: Application of molecular dynamics simulations and related approaches in drug discovery The application of QM, hybrid approaches such as QM/MM, and fragment molecular orbital framework for understanding protein-ligand interactions Adoption of artificial intelligence in pre-clinical drug discovery, encompassing protein structure prediction, generative modeling for de novo design, and virtual screening. Techniques for navigating and visualizing the chemical space, along with harnessing big data to drive drug discovery efforts. Methods for performing ultra-large-scale virtual screening for hit identification. Computational strategies for designing new therapeutic models, including PROTACs and molecular glues. In silico ADMET approaches for predicting a variety of pharmacokinetic and physicochemical endpoints. The role of computing technologies like quantum computing and cloud computing in accelerating drug discovery This book will provide readers an overview of the latest advancements in Computational Drug Discovery and serve as a valuable resource for professionals engaged in drug discovery.Table of ContentsVolume 1 Preface xv Acknowledgments xix About the Editors xxi Part I Molecular Dynamics and Related Methods in Drug Discovery 1 1 Binding Free Energy Calculations in Drug Discovery 3Anitade Ruiter and Chris Oostenbrink 2 Gaussian Accelerated Molecular Dynamics in Drug Discovery 21Hung N. Do, Jinan Wang, Keya Joshi, Kushal Koirala, and Yinglong Miao 3 MD Simulations for Drug-Target(Un)binding Kinetics 45Steffen Wolf 4 Solvation Thermodynamics and its Applications in Drug Discovery 65Kuzhanthaivelan Saravanan and Ramesh K. Sistla 5 Site-Identification by Ligand Competitive Saturation as a Paradigm of Co-solvent MD Methods 83Asuka A. Orr and Alexander D. MacKerell Jr. Part II Quantum Mechanics Application for Drug Discovery 119 6 QM/MM for Structure-Based Drug Design: Techniques and Applications 121Marc W. van der Kamp and Jaida Begum 7 Recent Advances in Practical Quantum Mechanics and Mixed-QM/MM-Driven X-Ray Crystallography and Cryogenic Electron Microscopy (Cryo-EM) and Their Impact on Structure-Based Drug Discovery 157Oleg Borbulevych and Lance M. Westerhoff 8 Quantum-Chemical Analyses of Interactions for Biochemical Applications 183Dmitri G. Fedorov Part III Artificial Intelligence in Pre-clinical Drug Discovery 211 9 The Role of Computer-Aided Drug Design in Drug Discovery 213Stormvander Voort, Andreas Bender, and Bart A. Westerman 10 AI-Based Protein Structure Predictions and Their Implications in Drug Discovery 227Tahsin F. Kellici, Dimitar Hristozov, and Inaki Morao 11 Deep Learning for the Structure-Based Binding Free Energy Prediction of Small Molecule Ligands 255Venkatesh Mysore, Nilkanth Patel, and Adegoke Ojewole 12 Using Artificial Intelligence for de novo Drug Design and Retrosynthesis 275Rohit Arora, Nicolas Brosse, Clarisse Descamps, Nicolas Devaux, Nicolas Do Huu, Philippe Gendreau, Yann Gaston-Mathé, Maud Parrot, Quentin Perron, and Hamza Tajmouati 13 Reliability and Applicability Assessment for Machine Learning Models 299Fabio Urbina and Sean Ekins Volume 2 Preface xv Acknowledgments xix About the Editors xxi Part IV Chemical Space and Knowledge-Based Drug Discovery 315 14 Enumerable Libraries and Accessible Chemical Space in Drug Discovery 317Tim Knehans, Nicholas A. Boyles, and Pieter H. Bos 15 Navigating Chemical Space 337Akos Tarcsay, András Volford, Jonathan Buttrick, Jan-Constantin Christopherson, Máte Erdos, and Zoltán B. Szabó 16 Visualization, Exploration, and Screening of Chemical Space in Drug Discovery 365José J. Naveja, Fernanda I. Saldívar-González, Diana L. Prado-Romero, Angel J.Ruiz-Moreno, Marco Velasco-Velázquez, Ramón Alain Miranda-Quintana, and José L. Medina-Franco 17 SAR Knowledge Bases for Driving Drug Discovery 395Nishanth Kandepedu, Anil Kumar Manchala, and Norman Azoulay 18 Cambridge Structural Database (CSD)–Drug Discovery Through Data Mining & Knowledge-Based Tools 419Francesca Stanzione, Rupesh Chikhale, and Laura Friggeri Part V Structure-Based Virtual Screening Using Docking 441 19 Structure-Based Ultra-Large Virtual Screenings 443Christoph Gorgulla 20 Community Benchmarking Exercises for Docking and Scoring 471Bharti Devi, Anurag TK Baidya, and Rajnish Kumar PartVI In Silico ADMET Modeling 495 21 Advances in the Application of In Silico ADMET Models–An Industry Perspective 497Wenyi Wang, Fjodor Melnikov, Joe Napoli, and Prashant Desai Part VII Computational Approaches for New Therapeutic Modalities 537 22 Modeling the Structures of Ternary Complexes Mediated by Molecular Glues 539Michael L. Drummond 23 Free Energy Calculations in Covalent Drug Design 561Levente M. Mihalovits, György G. Ferenczy, and György M. Keseru Part VIII Computing Technologies Driving Drug Discovery 579 24 Orion A Cloud-Native Molecular Design Platform 581Jesper Sorensen, Caitlin C. Bannan, Gaetano Calabrò, Varsha Jain, Grigory Ovanesyan, Addison Smith, She Zhang, Christopher I. Bayly, Tom A. Darden, Matthew T. Geballe, David N. LeBard, Mark McGann, Joseph B. Moon, Hari S. Muddana, Andrew Shewmaker, Jharrod LaFon, Robert W. Tolbert, A. Geoffrey Skillman, and Anthony Nicholls 25 Cloud-Native Rendering Platform and GPUs Aid Drug Discovery 617Mark Ross, Michael Drummond, Lance Westerhoff, Xavier Barbeu, Essam Metwally, Sasha Banks-Louie, Kevin Jorissen, Anup Ojah, and Ruzhu Chen 26 The Quantum Computing Paradigm 627Thomas Ehmer, Gopal Karemore, and Hans Melo Index 679
£184.31
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Metal Organic Frameworks for Wastewater
Book SynopsisMetal Organic Frameworks for Wastewater Contaminant Removal Discover a groundbreaking new wastewater decontamination technology The removal of wastewater contaminants is a key aspect of the water cycle, allowing water to be fed safely back into circulation within a given ecosystem. Metal-Organic Frameworks (MOFs) are a new class of porous materials which can reversibly bind and sequester both metal ions and potentially harmful organic substances, giving them a potentially crucial role in the targeted removal of wastewater contaminants. They may also enable significant cost and energy savings over now-conventional ion exchangers in water treatment plants. Metal Organic Frameworks for Wastewater Contaminant Removal provides an accessible, practical guide to the development, evaluation, and potential applications of MOFs in maintaining the water cycle. It begins with an overview of the major metallic and non-metallic contaminants found in wastewater and their interactions with major MOF-based materials, before moving to the challenges and opportunities provided by MOFs in the pursuit of a sustainable, energy-efficient water cycle. The result is a groundbreaking resource in the ever-expanding global fight to keep water clean and safe. Metal Organic Frameworks for Wastewater Contaminant Removal readers will also find: MOF technology and its water treatment applications discussed in depth for the first time in a major publication Comparison with existing decontamination technologies and environmental risk assessment Applications for environmental as well as industrial toxicants based on recent research and on case studies Metal Organic Frameworks for Wastewater Contaminant Removal is indispensable for water chemists, chemical engineers, environmental chemists, and for any researchers or industry professionals working with water decontamination technologies.Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Application of MOFs on Removal of Emerging Water Contaminants 1 Nguyen Minh Viet, Tran Thi Viet Ha, and Nguyen Le Minh Tri Abbreviated list 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.1 Sources of Emerging Water Contaminants 1 1.1.2 Emerging Water Contaminants Treatment Methods 2 1.1.3 MOFs as Exceptional Materials for Water Remediation 7 1.2 MOFs Strategies in Water Remediation 7 1.2.1 Adsorption 8 1.2.2 Catalyst 10 1.2.3 Synergistic Effect of Adsorption and Photocatalyst 12 1.3 Emerging Water Contaminants by MOFs 12 1.3.1 Organic Dyes 12 1.3.2 Adsorption 12 1.3.3 Photocatalytic and Electrostatic Activities 13 1.3.4 PPCPs 13 1.3.5 Adsorption 14 1.3.6 Photocatalytic Activities 14 1.3.7 Herbicides and Pesticides 15 1.3.8 Adsorption 15 1.3.9 Photocatalytic Activities 16 1.3.10 Industrial Compounds/By-products 17 1.3.11 Adsorption 17 1.3.12 Photocatalytic Activities 17 1.4 Challenges and Perspective in Using MOFs for the Removal of Emerging Water Contaminants 17 1.5 Conclusion 18 2 Metal-Organic Frameworks and Their Stepwise Preparatory Methods (Synthesis) for Water Treatment 27 Debarati Chakraborty and Prof. Siddhartha S. Dhar 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Classification of Metal-Organic Frameworks 28 2.3 Synthesis of MOFs 29 2.3.1 Conventional Solvothermal/Hydrothermal and Non-Solvothermal Method 29 2.3.2 Room-Temperature Synthesis 30 2.3.3 Unconventional Methods 30 2.4 Alternative Synthesis Methods 31 2.4.1 Microwave-Assisted Synthesis 31 2.4.2 Electrochemical Synthesis 32 2.4.3 Sonochemical Synthesis 34 2.4.4 Surfactant-Assisted Synthesis 35 2.4.5 Layer-by-Layer Synthesis 36 2.5 Factors Affecting the Synthesis of MOFs 37 2.5.1 Solvents 37 2.6 Temperature and pH Effects on the Synthesis of MOFs 38 2.7 Water Regeneration and Wastewater Treatment Using MOF Membranes 39 2.8 Membrane Filtration 39 2.9 Microfiltration (MF) 39 2.10 Ultrafiltration (UF) 40 2.11 Nanofiltration (NF) 40 2.12 Reverse Osmosis (RO) and Forward Osmosis (FO) 41 2.13 Membrane Distillation (MD) 41 2.14 Membrane Pervaporation (PV) 42 2.15 Conclusion 43 3 Application of MOFs in the Removal of Pharmaceutical Waste from Aquatic Environments 53 Gagandeep Kaur, Parul Sood, Lata Rani, and Nitin Verma 3.1 Introduction 53 3.2 The Potential of MOFs and Their Analogs to Resist Water Stability 55 3.3 Methods for the Development and Design of Aqueous-Stable Composites of Metal-Organic Frameworks 56 3.4 Synthesis and Design of Water-Stable MOF-Derived Materials 57 3.5 MOFs and Their Hybrids as Versatile Adsorbents for Capturing Pharmaceutical Drugs 58 3.6 MILs and Their Derived Compounds 58 3.7 Pristine MILs 58 3.8 MILs Composites 59 3.9 MILs-Derived Materials 60 3.10 ZIFs and Their Derived Compounds 60 3.11 Pristine ZIFs 60 3.12 ZIFs Composites 61 3.13 Materials Derived from ZIFs 61 3.14 UiOs Composite Materials 62 3.15 UiOs-Derived Materials 63 3.16 Pharmaceutical Drug Resistance 63 3.17 Conclusion 64 4 Efficiency of MOFs in Water Treatment Against the Emerging Water Contaminants Such as Endocrine Disruptors, Pharmaceuticals, Microplastics, Pesticides, and Other Contaminants 73 Jogindera Devi and Ajay Kumar 4.1 Introduction 73 4.2 Chemical Contaminants: Those Mysterious Ingredients in Ground and Surface Water 74 4.2.1 Endocrine Disruptors (EDs) 74 4.2.2 Microplastics (MPs) 74 4.2.3 Contaminants from the Agriculture Sector 75 4.2.4 Pharmaceutical Effluents 75 4.3 MOFs 76 4.3.1 MOF Stability in the Aqueous Phase 77 4.3.2 Improving the Water Stability of MOFs: General Enhancement Strategies 77 4.4 Possibilities for Wastewater Treatment Applications Using MOFs 78 4.4.1 MOF-Supported Adsorption & Photocatalysis 79 4.4.2 π-π Interactions 80 4.4.3 Electrostatic Interactions 80 4.4.4 Hydrophobic Interactions 81 4.4.5 H-Bonding 82 4.5 Use of MOFs for Water Remediation: Issues & Perspectives 82 4.6 Future 85 4.7 Conclusions 85 5 Metal-Organic Frameworks for Wastewater Contaminants Removal 95 Khushbu Sharma, Priyanka Devi, and Prasann Kumar 5.1 Introduction 95 5.2 Aqueous Phase MOF Stability 96 5.3 MOF Degradation in Water 97 5.4 Influence of MOF Structure 97 5.5 2D Nanostructured Coating 97 5.6 3D Nanostructure of MOF 98 5.7 MOF-Based Materials’ Adsorption Processes for Heavy Metal Oxyanion 99 5.8 Remediation Through Perfect MOFs 102 5.9 Interaction of MOFs with Other Species 102 5.10 With the Use of MOF Composites 103 5.11 Removal of Metal Ions through Adsorption 105 5.12 MOF Composites are Used for Removal 106 5.13 COFs are a New Class of Materials that Have Similar MOF Structures 107 5.14 Application of MOF Composites 108 5.15 Gas Separation and Adsorption 109 5.16 MOF Composites 110 5.17 Agrochemical Adsorption and Removal 111 5.18 Pharmaceutical and Personal Care Adsorption Removal Products (PPCPs) 112 5.19 MOFs for Photocatalytic Elimination of Organic Pollutants 113 5.20 Conclusion 113 Acknowledgment 114 Author Contributions 114 Conflicts of Interest 115 6 “Green Applications of Metal-Organic Frameworks for Wastewater Treatment” 119 Ankita Saini, Sunil Kumar Saini, and Parul Lakra 6.1 Introduction 119 6.2 Role of Green Chemistry in Preparation of MOFs 122 6.3 Green Application of MOFs in the Removal of Contaminants from Wastewater 124 6.3.1 MOFs for the Removal of Inorganic Contaminants 125 6.3.2 MOFs for the Removal of Organic Contaminants 136 6.4 Conclusion and Future Prospects 138 6.5 Conflict of Interest 139 7 Case Studies (Success Stories) on the Application of Metal-Organic Frameworks (MOFs) in Wastewater Treatment and Their Implementations; Review 151 Arpit Kumar, Mahesh Rachamalla, and Akshat Adarsh 7.1 Introduction 151 7.2 Metal-Organic Framework (MOF) 154 7.2.1 Properties and Applications of MOFs 154 7.3 Applications of MOFs in Wastewater Treatment: Case Studies 156 7.3.1 Forward Osmosis (FO) Membranes 159 7.3.2 Application and Effectiveness 159 7.3.3 Reverse Osmosis (RO) Membranes 160 7.3.4 Application and Effectiveness 161 7.3.5 Nano Filter (NF) Membranes 162 7.3.6 Application and Effectiveness 163 7.3.7 Ultrafiltration (UF) Membranes 164 7.3.8 Application and Effectiveness 165 Summary 166 Acknowledgment 167 8 Prospects and Potentials of Microbial Applications on Heavy-Metal Removal from Wastewater 177 Dipankar Ghosh, Shubhangi Chaudhary, and Snigdha Dhara 8.1 Introduction 177 8.2 Mainstream Avenues to Remediate Heavy Metals in Wastewater 178 8.3 The Microbial Recycling Approach 179 8.4 General Overview of Heavy-Metal Pollution in Wastewater 181 8.5 Techniques for Heavy-Metal Removal 183 8.6 Microbial and Biological Approaches for Removing Heavy Metals from Wastewater 186 8.7 Biological Remediation Approaches for Heavy-Metal Removal 187 8.8 Microbial Bioremediation Approaches 190 8.9 Bioengineering Approaches on Microbes for Improving Heavy-Metal Removal from Wastewater 191 8.10 Conclusion 192 Acknowledgment 193 9 Removal of Organic Contaminants from Aquatic Environments Using Metal-Organic Framework (MOF) Based Materials 203 Linkon Bharali and Siddhartha S. Dhar 9.1 Introduction 203 9.2 MOF-Based Materials 205 9.2.1 MOF—Metal Nanoparticle Materials 205 9.2.2 MOF–MO Materials 206 9.2.3 MOF–Quantum Dot Materials 207 9.2.4 MOF–Silica Materials 207 9.2.5 MOF–Carbon Materials 208 9.2.6 Core—shell Structures of MOFs 209 9.2.7 MOF–Enzyme Materials 210 9.2.8 MOF–Organic Polymer Materials 210 9.3 Environmental Effects of MOF-Based Materials 211 9.4 Conclusion 215 10 Reformed Metal-Organic Frameworks (MOFs) for Abstraction of Water Contaminants – Heavy-Metal Ions 227 Prakash B. Rathod, Rahul A. Kalel, Mahendra Pratap Singh Tomar, Akshay Chandrakant Dhayagude, and Parshuram D. Maske 10.1 Introduction 227 10.2 Metal-Organic Frameworks 228 10.3 Sorption Enrichment by Modification of MOFs 229 10.4 Toxic-Metal Ion Adsorption by MOFs 231 10.4.1 MOFs for Mercury Adsorption 231 10.4.2 MOFs for Lead Adsorption 234 10.4.3 MOFs for Cadmium Adsorption 235 10.4.4 MOFs for Chromium Removal 236 10.4.5 MOFs for Arsenic Removal 238 10.4.6 MOFs for Heavy Metals Phosphate Removal 239 10.4.7 MOFs for Nickel Adsorption 240 10.4.8 MOFs for Selenium Adsorption 240 10.4.9 MOFs for Uranium Adsorption 240 10.5 Future Perspective 241 10.6 Future Scope 241 10.7 Conclusions 242 11 Application of Algal-Polysaccharide Metal-Organic Frameworks in Wastewater Treatment 251 Dharitri Borah, Jayashree Rout, and Thajuddin Nooruddin 11.1 Introduction 251 11.1.1 Water Pollutants and Sources 251 11.1.2 Common Wastewater Treatment Techniques 252 11.1.3 Metal-Organic Frameworks for Wastewater Treatment 252 11.1.4 Polysaccharide-Metal-organic Frameworks (Ps-MOFs) 253 11.2 Polysaccharides in Algae/cyanobacteria (AlPs) 254 11.2.1 Polysaccharides in Cyanophyceae 254 11.2.2 Polysaccharides in Chlorophyceae 258 11.2.3 Polysaccharides in Rhodophyceae 258 11.2.4 Polysaccharides in Phaeophyceae 259 11.3 Synthesis of Algal Polysaccharide MOFs (ALPs-MOFs) 259 11.3.1 Alginate-MOFs 260 11.3.2 Cellulose-MOFs 262 11.3.3 Agar-MOFs 263 11.4 Characterization of AlP-MOFs 264 11.5 Adsorption Mechanism of AlPs-MOFs 268 11.6 Regeneration of AlPs-MOFs 271 11.7 Conclusion and Future Prospects 272 12 Ecological Risk Assessment of Heavy Metal Pollution in Water Resources 281 Swati Singh and K. V. Suresh Babu 12.1 Introduction 281 12.2 Natural and Anthropogenic Sources of Heavy Metals in the Environment 282 12.3 Impacts of Heavy Metal Pollution 283 12.4 Water Quality Assessment Using Pollution Indices 286 12.4.1 Heavy Metal Pollution Index (HPI) 287 12.4.2 Statistical Technique 288 12.5 MOFs for Heavy Metal Contaminant Removal from Water 289 12.6 Conclusion 290 13 Organic Contaminants in Aquatic Environments: Sources and Impact Assessment 299 Shipa Rani Dey, Priyanka Devi, and Prasann Kumar 13.1 Introduction 299 13.2 The Various Forms and Causes of Chemical Pollutants 300 13.3 Increasing Contaminant Occurrence in Aquatic Systems 302 13.4 Identifying Potential Points of Entry for New Pollutants into Aquatic Systems 304 13.5 Groups of Trace Pollutants and ECs 305 13.5.1 Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDEs) 305 13.6 Pharmaceuticals and Personal Care Products (PPCPs) 306 13.7 Concentrations of Micropollutants in Aquatic Organisms 308 13.8 Methods for Micropollutant Removal 308 13.9 Mitigation of Aqueous Micropollutants 310 13.10 Chemical Treatment of Wastewater Discharge 311 13.11 Conclusion 311 Acknowledgment 312 Authors Contributions 312 Conflicts of Interest 312 14 Physicochemical Properties and Stability of MOFs in Water Environments 319 Priya Saharan, Vinit Kumar, Indu Kaushal, Ashok Kumar Sharma, Narender Ranga, and Dharmender Kumar 14.1 Introduction 319 14.2 Background and Future Scope of MOFs 320 14.3 Techniques Used to Determine the Physicochemical Properties of MOFs 320 14.3.1 Powder X-Ray Diffraction (PXRD) 321 14.3.2 BET Surface Area Analyzer 321 14.3.3 Electron Microscopy and Elemental Analysis 322 14.3.4 Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) 322 14.3.5 Fourier-Transform Infrared (FT-IR) 322 14.4 Physicochemical Properties of MOFs and Their Effects on Various Applications 322 14.4.1 Porosity 322 14.4.2 Size and Morphology 323 14.4.3 Chemical Reactivity 325 14.4.4 Chemical Stability 327 14.4.5 Thermal Stability 329 14.4.6 Mechanical Stability 331 14.5 Conclusion 332 15 Metal-Organic Framework Adsorbents for Indutrial Heavy-Metal Wastewater Treatment 337 Gopal Sonkar 15.1 Introduction 337 15.2 The Applications of MOFs 338 15.3 Comparison Between MOF Adsorbents and Bio-Based Adsorbents 338 15.4 Heavy Metal Contaminant Sources and Impacts 340 15.5 Adsorption 343 15.5.1 The Adsorption Process 343 15.5.2 Adsorption Mechanisms 344 15.5.3 Adsorption Parameters 344 15.5.4 Different Processes for Methods of Adsorption 345 15.6 A Specific Review on Tea-Waste Adsorption 347 15.7 Conclusions 348 16 Evaluation of MOF Applications for Groundwater Arsenic Mitigation of the Middle Ganga Plains of Bihar, India 355 Arun Kumar, Vivek Raj, Mohammad Ali, Abhinav, Mahesh Rachamalla, Dhruv Kumar, Arti Kumari, Rakesh Kumar, Prabhat Shankar, and Ashok Kumar Ghosh 16.1 Arsenic Contamination in the Groundwater of Bihar 355 16.2 Status of Groundwater Arsenic Exposure in the Affected Population 361 16.2.1 Mitigation Status in the Arsenic-Exposed Area of Bihar 364 16.2.2 Application of MOFs in Arsenic Removal from Groundwater 364 16.2.3 Conclusion 365 Index 375
£114.75
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Biomedical Applications of Extracellular Vesicles
Book SynopsisBiomedical Applications of Extracellular Vesicles Unique resource focusing on biomedical applications and clinical translation of extracellular vesicles in science and medicine Focusing on key points to better understand extracellular vesicles (EVs) and their development, Biomedical Applications of Extracellular Vesicles describes in detail the biogenesis of EVs, the mechanism of intercellular communication, and the treatment of various diseases of EVs and the EV-based drug delivery platforms. An application-oriented resource, the work presents rapidly newer biomedical and clinical applications of natural and engineered EVs such as drug delivery, diagnosis, prognosis monitoring, immunotherapy, and more. The first part of this book provides a basic background on EVs. Next, the book introduces the excellent therapeutic effects of EVs themselves and the underlying mechanisms, followed by how EVs from different sources were used to construct drug delivery platforms. The latest research on EVs from leading groups around the world is presented. Sample topics covered in Biomedical Applications of Extracellular Vesicles include: Biogenesis of various EVs Pros and cons of the different instrumental and methodological developments for analytical strategies applied to EVs EVs in treatment of major diseases, such as cancer, cardiovascular and respiratory diseases Current methods of engineering EVs, and a comparison of the advantages and disadvantages of each method Biomaterials, such as hydrogels, scaffolds, and microneedles, that have been developed to further enhance the therapeutic efficacy of EVs Key challenges, such as quality control, scalability, and biosafety, that limit the clinical and industrial translation of EVs Explaining in detail how extracellular vesicles are produced and engineered, along with potential applications and commercial developments of EVs in science and industry, Biomedical Applications of Extracellular Vesicles is an essential resource on the subject for chemists, cell biologists, and molecular physicists.Table of ContentsPreface xi 1 Extracellular Vesicles and Their Biomedical Applications: An Overview 1 Xing-Jie liang, Ke Cheng, and Zhenhua li 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Biogenesis and Composition of Extracellular Vesicles 1 1.3 Biological Functions of Extracellular Vesicles 2 1.4 Extracellular Vesicles Isolation and Limitations 3 2 Biogenesis and Identification of Extracellular Vesicles 5 Dandan Ding, Xing Zhang, Yu Zhao, Xiaoya Li, Qingqing Leng, and Zhenhua li 2.1 Biogenesis of Extracellular Vesicles 5 2.1.1 Biogenesis of Exosome 6 2.1.2 Biogenesis of Microvesicle 8 2.1.3 Biogenesis of Apoptotic Bodies 8 2.1.4 Biogenesis of Large Oncosomes 9 2.2 Identification of Extracellular Vesicles 9 2.2.1 Electron Microscopic Identification 9 2.2.1.1 Scanning Electron Microscopy 9 2.2.1.2 Transmission Electron Microscopy 10 2.2.1.3 Atomic Force Microscopy 11 2.2.1.4 Cryo-Electron Microscopy 12 2.2.2 Particle Size Detection 13 2.2.2.1 Nanoparticle Tracking Analysis 13 2.2.2.2 Dynamic Light Scattering 14 2.2.3 Surface Protein Assay 16 2.2.3.1 Protein Immunoblotting Method 17 2.2.3.2 Nano-Flow Cytometry 19 2.2.3.3 Enzyme-Linked Immunosorbent Assay 19 2.2.4 Other Methods 21 2.2.4.1 Tunable Resistive Pulse Sensing 21 2.2.4.2 Single EV Analysis Technique 22 2.2.4.3 Micronuclear Magnetic Resonance 23 References 24 3 Therapeutic Potential of Extracellular Vesicles from Different Cell Sources 35 Xueyi Wang and Zhenhua li 3.1 Extracellular Vesicles Derived from Stem Cells (SCs) 35 3.1.1 Extracellular Vesicles Derived from Mesenchymal Stem Cells (MSCs) 37 3.1.1.1 Kidney Injury 38 3.1.1.2 Myocardial Ischemia/Reperfusion Injury (MI/RI) 38 3.1.1.3 Spinal Cord Injury (SCI) 39 3.1.1.4 Cancer 40 3.1.2 Extracellular Vesicles Derived from Neural Stem Cells (NSCs) 40 3.1.3 Extracellular Vesicles Derived from Endothelial Progenitor Cells (EPCs) 41 3.1.4 Extracellular Vesicles Derived from Cardiac Progenitor Cells (CPCs) and Other Stem Cells 41 3.2 Extracellular Vesicles Derived from Immune Cells 42 3.2.1 Extracellular Vesicles Derived from Macrophages 42 3.2.2 Extracellular Vesicles Derived from Dendritic Cells (DCs) 44 3.2.3 Extracellular Vesicles Derived from T Cells 45 3.2.4 Extracellular Vesicles Derived from Natural Killer (NK) Cells 46 3.3 Extracellular Vesicles Derived from Cancer Cells 47 3.4 Extracellular Vesicles Derived from Plants 49 3.4.1 Anti-inflammatory 49 3.4.2 Anticancer 50 3.4.3 Antibacterial 51 3.4.4 Antioxidation 51 References 51 4 Biomedical Applications of Extracellular Vesicles in Treatment of Disease 59 Fei Wang, Jiacong Ai, Ziyang Zhang, Yuanhang li, and Zhenhua li 4.1 Tissue Engineering and Regenerative Medicine 60 4.2 Metabolic Diseases 67 4.3 Cardiovascular Diseases 74 4.4 Respiratory Diseases 85 4.5 Cancers 88 4.6 Conclusion and Perspectives 93 References 94 5 Applications of Engineered Extracellular Vesicles 101 Lanya li, Yingxian Xiao, Shushan Mo, and Zhenhua li 5.1 Engineering EVs for Cargo Loading 101 5.1.1 Endogenous Loading 101 5.1.2 Exogenous Loading 104 5.2 Engineering EVs for Surface Modification 106 5.2.1 Genetic Engineering 106 5.2.2 Chemical Modification 108 5.2.3 Hydrophobic Membrane Engineering 109 References 111 6 Current Technology for Production, Isolation, and Quality Control of Extracellular Vesicles 117 Dandan Han, Yichuan Ma, Yujing Hu, and Zhenhua li 6.1 Production of EVs 117 6.1.1 Three-Dimensional Culture 117 6.1.2 Physical Stimulation 119 6.1.3 Chemical Stimulation 120 6.1.4 Physiological Modification 120 6.1.5 Genetic Manipulation 121 6.2 Extraction of EVs 122 6.2.1 Separation Strategies of EVs 123 6.2.2 Ultracentrifugation Approach 123 6.2.2.1 Differential Ultracentrifugation 123 6.2.2.2 Isopycnic and Moving-Zone Density Gradient Ultracentrifugation 125 6.2.3 Ultrafiltration Approach 125 6.2.4 Size-Exclusion Chromatography 127 6.2.5 Polymer Precipitation Strategy 128 6.2.6 Immunoaffinity Capture Approach 128 6.2.7 Microfluidic Technology 129 6.2.8 Other Methods 131 6.3 Quality Control of EVs 132 6.3.1 Transmission Electron Microscopy 133 6.3.2 High-Resolution Liquid Chromatography–Mass Spectrometry 134 6.3.3 Enzyme-Linked Immunosorbent Assay 134 6.3.4 Fourier-Transform Infrared Attenuated Total Reflection Spectroscopy 135 6.3.5 Capillary Electrophoresis 135 6.3.6 Nanoparticles Tracking Analysis 136 6.3.7 Flow Cytometer 137 6.3.8 Other Techniques 138 References 140 7 Prospects and Limitations of Clinical Application of Extracellular Vesicles 147 li Luo, Weirun li, and Zhenhua li 7.1 Application of Exosomes as Liquid Biopsy in Clinical Diagnosis 147 7.2 Exosomes—It has Become a Star Molecule in Disease Diagnosis 147 7.2.1 Exosomes Could Be Used as Prognostic and Diagnostic Biomarkers in Cancer 150 7.2.2 Exosomes Biopsy Strategies were Proposed to Target the Different Cancers 152 7.2.2.1 Pancreatic Cancer 152 7.2.2.2 Gastric Cancer 152 7.2.2.3 Lung Cancer 152 7.2.2.4 Breast Cancer 153 7.2.2.5 Liver Cancer 153 7.2.2.6 Ovarian Cancer 153 7.2.2.7 Melanoma 154 7.2.2.8 Colon Cancer 154 7.2.2.9 Glioma 155 7.2.3 Exosomes in Clinical Trial for Cancer Biopsy 155 7.3 The Commercial Application of Exosomes 158 7.3.1 Tumor Therapy 158 7.3.2 Lung Infection and ARDS Treatment 158 7.3.3 Cardiovascular Disease Treatment 160 7.3.4 Liver and Kidney Injury Treatment 160 7.3.5 Ophthalmology Treatment 160 7.3.6 Cartilage Injury Treatment 161 7.3.7 Other Treatments 161 7.3.8 Engineering of Exosome Delivery 161 7.3.9 Skin Repair and Medical Skincare Products 164 7.4 Commercial Development of Exosomes 166 7.4.1 Analysis of Representative Companies of Exosomes 168 7.4.1.1 ExoCoBio 168 7.4.1.2 Direct Biologics 168 7.4.1.3 Tianjin Exocrine Science and Technology 169 7.4.1.4 TheraXyte 170 7.4.1.5 Exosome Diagnostics 170 7.4.1.6 Codiak 171 7.4.1.7 Evox 171 7.4.1.8 EVerZom 171 7.5 Issues and Challenges 172 7.5.1 Quality Control 172 7.5.2 Storage Stability 172 7.5.3 Product Safety 173 7.5.4 Drug-Forming Properties of Engineered Exosomes 173 References 174 8 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 181 Xing-Jie liang, Ke Cheng, and Zhenhua li 8.1 Summary and Conclusions 181 8.2 General Trends and Developments 182 8.2.1 EVs in Drug Delivery 182 8.2.2 Engineered EVs in Biomedical Applications 183 8.2.3 EVs for Clinical Applications When Comparing with Liposomes 184 8.3 Challenges for Future Research 185 8.3.1 Standardization and Quality Control 185 8.3.2 Scalability and Manufacturing 185 8.3.3 Targeting and Biodistribution 186 8.3.4 Safety and Toxicity 186 8.3.5 Regulatory Challenges 186 8.3.6 Heterogeneity of EV Populations 187 8.3.7 Understanding the Role of EVs in Disease Progression and Development 187 Index 189
£106.25
Wiley Mechanics of Flexible and Stretchable Electronics
Book Synopsis
£119.00
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Pathway Design for Industrial Fermentation
Book SynopsisPathway Design for Industrial Fermentation Explore the industrial fermentation processes of chemical intermediates In Pathway Design for Industrial Fermentation, distinguished researcher Dr. Walter Koch delivers an expert overview on industrial fermentation production technology as compared with natural extraction, organic chemistry, and biocatalysis. The book offers key insights for professionals designing and monitoring fermentation processes. The author explores the applications, alternative production, biochemical pathways, metabolic engineering strategy, and downstream processing of various productsincluding C1 to C6 productswith a focus on low-value products with market prices below 4 per kilogram. Products will include methane, ethane, acetate, lactic acid, alanine, and others. With specific commentary and insightful perspectives on the cost drivers and technological aspects critical to commercially successful applications, the book also includes: Thorough introductions to meth
£98.56
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Functional Polymer Foams
Book Synopsis
£106.25
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Nanophysik und Nanotechnologie: Eine Einführung in die Konzepte der Nanowissenschaft
a huge range and FREE tracked UK delivery on ALL orders.
£999.99
John Wiley & Sons Inc Handbook of Vacuum Technology
Book SynopsisThis comprehensive, standard work has been updated to remain an important resource for all those needing detailed knowledge of the theory and applications of vacuum technology. The text covers the existing knowledge on all aspects of vacuum science and technology, ranging from fundamentals to components and operating systems. It features many numerical examples and illustrations to help visualize the theoretical issues, while the chapters are carefully cross-linked and coherent symbols and notations are used throughout the book. The whole is rounded off by a user-friendly appendix of conversion tables, mathematical tools, material related data, overviews of processes and techniques, equipment-related data, national and international standards, guidelines, and much more. As a result, engineers, technicians, and scientists will be able to develop and work successfully with the equipment and environment found in a vacuum.Table of ContentsThe History of Vacuum Science and Vacuum Technology Applications and Scope of Vacuum Technology Gas Laws and Kinetic Theory of Gases Gas Flow Analytical and Numerical Calculations of Rarefied Gas Flows Sorption and Diffusion Positive Displacement Pumps Jet and Diffusion Pumps Molecular and Turbomolecular Pumps Sorption Pumps Cryotechnology and Cryopumps Total Pressure Vacuum Gauges Partial Pressure Vacuum Gauges and Leak Detectors Calibrations and Standards Materials Vacuum Components, Seals and Joints Operating Vacuum Systems Methods of Leak Detection Appendix
£999.99
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Mathematik in den Ingenieur- und Naturwissenschaften 1: Lineare Algebra und analytische Geometrie, Differential- und Integralrechnung einer Variablen
Book SynopsisFür alle, die es genauer wissen wollen: Band 1 der Neuauflage des unschlagbar präzisen Ansorge/Oberle-Lehrwerks zur Mathematik in den Ingenieur- und Naturwissenschaften In sämtlichen Ingenieurwissenschaften, insbesondere im Maschinenbau, im Bauingenieurwesen und in der Elektrotechnik, ist Mathematik unverzichtbar bei der Beschreibung, Modellierung und Lösung ingenieurwissenschaftlicher Probleme. Für Studierende dieser Fächer ist es daher unabdingbar, sich detailliert mit der Mathematik auseinanderzusetzen und Wissen zu erwerben, das über die reine Anwendung von "Kochrezepten" hinausgeht. Der vorliegende Band 1 des vollständig überarbeiteten und erweiterten Lehrwerks "Mathematik in den Ingenieur- und Naturwissenschaften" gibt eine Einführung in die Lineare Algebra und analytische Geometrie sowie die Differential- und Integralrechnung einer Variablen. Bei den Herleitungen wird besonderer Wert gelegt auf Vollständigkeit und mathematische Exaktheit. In den Beispielen behandeln die Autoren die Anwendung mathematischer Techniken und Vorgehensweisen auf häufig vorkommende Probleme in den Ingenieurwissenschaften. Numerische Methoden und deren Implementierung in MATLAB runden das Buch ab. * Zum Tiefereinsteigen: besonders geeignet für diejenigen, die eine anspruchsvolle Darstellung der höheren Mathematik in den Ingenieur- und Naturwissenschaften suchen * Bewährtes Konzept, überarbeitet und erweitert: präzise, sauber, fachlich korrekt und anwendungsnah * Neu in dieser Auflage: mit mehr Motivationen und Erläuterungen und zahlreichen neuen Anwendungsbeispielen und Modellbildungen * Dazu passend: das neue Aufgaben- und LösungsbuchTrade Review"Die Lehrbücher liefern eine anspruchsvolle Darstellung der höheren Mathematik für Studenten der Ingenieur- und Naturwissenschaften. Die 5. Auflage bietet noch mehr Erläuterungen sowie zahlreiche neue Anwendungsbeispiele." METALL, 26.05.2020 Table of ContentsVorwort zur fünften Auflage ix Vorwort zur vierten Auflage xi Vorwort zur dritten Auflage xiii Vorwort zur zweiten Auflage xv Vorwort xvii 1 Aussagen, Mengen und Funktionen 1 1.1 Aussagen 1 1.2 Mengen 6 1.3 Funktionen 10 2 Zahlenbereiche 17 2.1 Naturliche Zahlen 17 2.2 Reelle Zahlen 25 2.3 Komplexe Zahlen 33 3 Vektorrechnung und Analytische Geometrie 45 3.1 Vektoren 45 3.2 Geraden und Ebenen im ℝ3 61 3.3 Allgemeine Vektorraume 65 4 Lineare Gleichungssysteme 73 4.1 Matrizenkalkul 73 4.2 Gaus-Elimination 77 4.3 Inverse Matrizen 85 4.4 Die Dreieckszerlegung einer Matrix 90 4.5 Determinanten 97 5 Lineare Abbildungen 109 5.1 Lineare Abbildungen – Basisdarstellung 109 5.2 Orthogonalitat 116 5.3 Orthogonale Transformationen 124 6 Lineare Ausgleichsprobleme und lineare Programme 133 6.1 Ausgleichsprobleme und Normalgleichungen 133 6.2 Die QR-Zerlegung 137 6.3 Lineare Programme 142 6.4 Das Simplexverfahren 148 7 Eigenwerttheorie fürMatrizen 153 7.1 Eigenwerte und Eigenvektoren 153 7.2 Symmetrische Matrizen und Hauptachsentransformation 168 7.3 Numerische Berechnung von Eigenwerten und Eigenvektoren 180 8 Konvergenz von Folgen und Reihen 193 8.1 Folgen 193 8.2 Konvergenzkriterien fur reelle Folgen 199 8.2.1 Folgen in Vektorraumen 207 8.2.2 Konvergenzkriterien fur Reihen 209 9 Stetigkeit und Differenzierbarkeit 217 9.1 Stetigkeit und Grenzwerte von Funktionen 217 9.2 Differentialrechnung einer Variablen 227 10 Weiterer Ausbau der Differentialrechnung 237 10.1 Mittelwertsatze und Satz von Taylor 237 10.2 Die Regeln von de l’Hospital 253 10.3 Kurvendiskussion 255 10.4 Fehlerrechnung 258 10.5 Fixpunkt-Iterationen 264 11 Potenzreihen und elementare Funktionen 271 11.1 Gleichmaβige Konvergenz 271 11.2 Potenzreihen 274 11.3 Elementare Funktionen 280 12 Interpolation 289 12.1 Problemstellung 289 12.2 Polynom-Interpolation nach Aitken, Neville und Newton 295 12.3 Spline-Interpolation 299 13 Integration 305 13.1 Das bestimmte Integral 305 13.2 Kriterien fur Integrierbarkeit 310 13.3 Der Hauptsatz und Anwendungen 314 13.4 Integration rationaler Funktionen 321 13.5 Uneigentliche Integrale 326 13.6 Parameterabhangige Integrale 331 14 Anwendungen der Integralrechnung 337 14.1 Rotationskorper 337 14.2 Kurven und Bogenlange 342 14.3 Kurvenintegrale 349 15 Numerische Quadratur 353 15.1 Die Newton-Cotes-Formeln 354 15.2 Extrapolation 359 16 Periodische Funktionen, Fourier-Reihen 365 16.1 Grundlegende Begriffe 365 16.2 Fourier-Reihen 371 16.3 Numerische Berechnung der Fourier-Koeffizienten 382 Weiterführende Literatur 389 Stichwortverzeichnis 393
£33.75
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Physik in den Ingenieur- und Naturwissenschaften,
Book SynopsisAnschaulichkeit vor Formalismus - die unvergleichlich verständliche Einführung in die Mechanik und Thermodynamik für Studierende der Natur- und Ingenieurwissenschaften in neuer Auflage! Elektrotechnik, Maschinenbau, Chemie, Geophysik, Biologie: eine Einführung in die Physik gehört für alle Studierende der Natur- und Ingenieurwissenschaften unumgänglich zum Studium dazu, sei es im Rahmen der Physikvorlesungen für Hauptfachstudierende oder in Form auf spezifische Studiengänge zugeschnittener Veranstaltungen. Die vierte Auflage des Lehrbuchklassikers von Friedhelm Kuypers gibt in gewohnt anschaulicher Weise eine Einführung in die Mechanik und die Thermodynamik; neu hinzugekommen sind ein leicht verständlicher Überblick zum schwer greifbaren Thema Entropie und zu erneuerbaren Energien. Jeder Abschnitt wurde vollständig überarbeitet, um noch besser auf immer wieder vorkommende Probleme der Studierenden einzugehen. Im Aufgaben- und Lösungsteil werden die mittleren und schweren Aufgaben mit einer anschaulichen Vorstellung der behandelten Physik eingeleitet, bevor die eigentlichen Rechnungen beginnen.Table of ContentsA Mechanik 1 Einführung 1 1.1 Einleitung 1 1.2 Messung und Maßeinheit 2 1.3 Die Einheit Sekunde 4 1.4 Die Einheit Meter 4 1.5 Die Einheit Kilogramm 6 2 Kinematik der Massenpunkte 7 2.1 Idealisierungen 7 2.2 Geschwindigkeit 8 2.3 Einführung in die Integralrechnung 10 2.4 Beschleunigung 13 2.5 Kreisbewegung 17 2.6 Noch einmal in Kürze 21 2.7 Aufgaben 22 3 Die Newtonschen Axiome und Kräfte 24 3.1 Das erste Newtonsche Axiom 24 3.2 Das zweite und dritte Newtonsche Axiom 26 3.3 Lösung einfacher Bewegungsgleichungen 28 3.4 Reibungskräfte 36 3.5 Noch einmal in Kürze 42 3.6 Aufgaben 43 4 Arbeit, Leistung und Energie 49 4.1 Arbeit 49 4.2 Leistung 53 4.3 Energie 56 4.4 Erneuerbare Energien * 62 4.5 Noch einmal in Kürze 72 4.6 Aufgaben 73 5 Impulssatz und Drehimpulssatz 81 5.1 Impulssatz 81 5.2 Drehimpulsssatz für Massenpunkte 92 5.3 Noch einmal in Kürze 100 5.4 Aufgaben 101 6 Bewegungen starrer Körper 107 6.1 Schwerpunktsatz 107 6.2 Trägheitsmomente 111 6.3 Drehungen um raumfeste Achsen 117 6.4 Ebene Bewegungen starrer Körper 121 6.5 Kinetische Energie ebener Bewegungen 127 6.6 Unwuchtkräfte * 127 6.7 Noch einmal in Kürze 131 6.8 Aufgaben 133 7 Lineare Schwingungen 137 7.1 Freie Schwingungen 137 7.2 Erzwungene Schwingungen 146 7.3 Mechanische und elektrische Schwingungen * 157 7.4 Gekoppelte Pendel 158 7.5 Noch einmal in Kürze 162 7.6 Aufgaben 164 8 Strömungslehre 171 8.1 Grundlagen 171 8.2 Die Bernoulli-Gleichung 175 8.3 Laminare Strömungen 186 8.4 Turbulenzbildung und Reynolds-Zahl 194 8.5 Strömungswiderstand umströmter Körper 199 8.6 Modelltechnik * 201 8.7 Windkraftanlagen * 202 8.8 Noch einmal in Kürze 209 8.9 Aufgaben 211 B Thermodynamik 9 Einführung in die Thermodynamik 215 10 Temperatur 218 10.1 Definition der Temperaturskala 218 10.2 Thermische Ausdehnung 223 10.3 Temperaturmessung 228 10.4 Noch einmal in Kürze 229 10.5 Aufgaben 230 11 Ideale Gasgleichung 232 11.1 Die Basiseinheit Mol 232 11.2 Aufstellung der idealen Gasgleichung 235 11.3 Noch einmal in Kürze 239 11.4 Aufgaben 240 12 Kinetische Gastheorie 242 12.1 Definition des idealen Gases 242 12.2 Grundgleichung der kinetischen Gastheorie 243 12.3 Die Einheit Kelvin 249 12.4 Geschwindigkeitsverteilung 249 12.5 Noch einmal in Kürze 253 12.6 Aufgaben 254 13 Erster Hauptsatz der Thermodynamik 256 13.1 Wärme 256 13.2 Erster Hauptsatz der Thermodynamik 257 13.3 Wärmeübergang 259 13.4 Volumenänderungsarbeit 262 13.5 Gleichverteilungssatz und Wärmekapazität 266 13.6 Adiabatische Zustandsänderungen 272 13.7 Noch einmal in Kürze 276 13.8 Aufgaben 278 14 Zweiter Hauptsatz der Thermodynamik 282 14.1 Formulierungen von Clausius und Kelvin 282 14.2 Reversible und irreversible Prozesse 285 14.3 Wirkungsgrad reversibler und irreversibler Prozesse 292 14.4 Der Carnot-Prozess 294 14.5 Entropie * 302 14.6 Dritter Hauptsatz der Thermodynamik 312 14.7 Noch einmal in Kürze 312 14.8 Aufgaben 313 15 Phasenumwandlungen 319 15.1 Umwandlungswärmen und -temperaturen 319 15.2 Verdampfung und Kondensation 324 15.3 p,T-Diagramme 332 15.4 Zustandsgleichung realer Gase * 337 15.5 Verflüssigung von Gasen * 340 15.6 Kältemaschinen 342 15.7 Noch einmal in Kürze 347 15.8 Aufgaben 350 16 Wärmeübertragung 354 16.1 Wärmeleitung 354 16.2 Konvektion 362 16.3 Wärmestrahlung 364 16.4 Strahlungsaustausch * 377 16.5 Noch einmal in Kürze 379 16.6 Aufgaben 381 Lösungen Lösungen: 2 Kinematik der Massenpunkte 387 Lösungen: 3 Die Newtonschen Axiome und Kräfte 391 Lösungen: 4 Arbeit, Energie und Leistung 399 Lösungen: 5 Impuls- und Drehimpulssatz 412 Lösungen: 6 Starrer Körper 421 Lösungen: 7 Lineare Schwingungen 431 Lösungen: 8 Strömungslehre 443 Lösungen: 10 Temperatur 451 Lösungen: 11 Ideale Gasgleichung 453 Lösungen: 12 Kinetische Gastheorie 457 Lösungen: 13 Erster Hauptsatz 458 Lösungen: 14 Zweiter Hauptsatz 464 Lösungen: 15 Phasenumwandlungen 475 Lösungen: 16 Wärmeübertragung 481 Stichwortverzeichnis 497 Periodensystem 512
£33.20
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH WileySchnellkurs Stromungsmechanik
Book SynopsisSie suchen einen schnellen Überblick über die Strömungsmechanik? Dann ist dies genau das richtige Buch für Sie. Die Autoren erklären zuerst die wichtigen Grundlagen und Eigenschaften von Fluiden. Dann erläutern sie, was es zu ruhenden und sich bewegenden Fluiden zu wissen gibt und führen Sie in die Anwendung für ideale und reibungsbehaftete Strömungen ein. Anschließend lernen Sie das Wesentliche über Impulssatz, kompressiblen Strömungen und Strömungen mit Arbeitsaustausch. Übungsaufgaben mit Lösungen helfen Ihnen, Ihr Wissen zu festigen und zu prüfen.
£16.14
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Liquid Metals: Properties, Mechanisms, and
Book SynopsisAn up-to-date exploration of the properties and most recent applications of liquid metals In Liquid Metal: Properties, Mechanisms, and Applications, a pair of distinguished researchers delivers a comprehensive exploration of liquid metals with a strong focus on their structure and physicochemical properties, preparation methods, and tuning strategies. The book also illustrates the applications of liquid metals in fields as varied as mediated synthesis, 3D printing, flexible electronics, biomedicine, energy storage, and energy conversion. The authors include coverage of reactive mediums for synthesizing and assembling nanomaterials and direct-writing electronics, and the book offers access to supplementary video materials to highlight the concepts discussed within. Recent advancements in the field of liquid metals are also discussed, as are new opportunities for research and development in this rapidly developing area. The book also includes: A thorough introduction to the fundamentals of liquid metal, including a history of its discovery, its structure and physical properties, and its preparation Comprehensive explorations of the external field tuning of liquid metal, including electrical, magnetic, and chemical tuning Practical discussions of liquid metal as a new reaction medium, including nanomaterial synthesis and alloy preparation In-depth examinations of constructing techniques of liquid metal-based architectures, including injection, imprinting, and mask-assisted depositing Perfect for materials scientists, electrochemists, and catalytic chemists, Liquid Metal: Properties, Mechanisms, and Applications also belongs in the libraries of inorganic chemists, electronics engineers, and biochemists.Table of ContentsPART I FUNDAMENTALS OF LIQUID METAL 1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 Introduction 1.2 The history of liquid metal 1.3 Fundamental physical and chemical properties of liquid metal 1.4 The overview of liquid metal 1.5 Conclusion and prospect 2. STRUCTURE AND PHYSICOCHEMICAL PROPERTIES OF LIQUID METAL 2.1 Structure of liquid metal 2.2 Surface and interfacial properties of liquid metal 2.3 Electrical properties of liquid metal 2.4 Heat transport properties of liquid metal 2.5 Rheological properties of liquid metal 2.6 Theoretical simulation of liquid metal fluid dynamics 2.7 Properties of 2D liquid metal 3. PREPARATION OF LIQUID METAL 3.1 The availability of liquid metals 3.2 Preparation of liquid metal droplets 3.3 Preparation of 2D liquid metal 3.4 Preparation of liquid-metal composites 4. EXTERNAL FIELD TUNING OF LIQUID METAL 4.1 Electrical field tuning 4.2 Magnetic field tuning 4.3 Force field tuning 4.4 Others field tuning 4.5 Multi-field tuning PART II EMERGENT APPLICATIONS OF LIQUID METAL 5. LIQUID METAL AS A NEW REACTION MEDIUM 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Nanomaterial synthesis 5.3 Alloy preparation 5.4 Conclusion and prospect 6. LIQUID METAL FOR CONSTRUCTING ARCHITECTURES 6.1 Introduction 6.2 2D patterning 6.3 3D shaping 6.4 Conclusion and prospect 7. LIQUID METAL FOR STRETCHABLE ELECTRONICS 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Traditional materials for stretchable electronics 7.3 Advantages of liquid metal 7.4 Construction strategy for liquid-metal-based stretchable electronics 7.5 Typical stretchable electronics based on liquid metal 7.6 Conclusion and prospect 8. LIQUID METAL FOR BIOMEDICINE 8.1 Introduction 8.2 The advantage of liquid metal in biomedicine 8.3 Drug delivery 8.4 Cancer or tumor therapy 8.5 Molecular imaging 8.6 Biomedical device 8.7 Conclusion and prospect 9. LIQUID METAL FOR ENERGY 9.1 Introduction 9.2 Liquid metal as electrodes 9.3 Liquid metal as phase change material 9.4 Liquid metal as a coolant in nuclear industry 9.5 Liquid metal for catalysis 9.6 Conclusion and prospect 10. OUTLOOK and PERSPECTIVES
£999.99
Springer-Verlag Berlin and Heidelberg GmbH & Co. KG Condensed Matter Physics: Crystals, Liquids,
Book SynopsisDerived from lectures at the University of Freiburg, this textbook introduces solid-state physics as well as the physics of liquids, liquid crystals and polymers. The five chapters deal with the key characteristics of condensed matter: structures, susceptibilities, molecular fields, currents, and dynamics. The author strives to present and explain coherently the terms and concepts associated with the main properties and characteristics of condensed matter, while minimizing attention to extraneous details. As a result, this text provides the firm and broad basis of understanding that readers require for further study and research.Trade ReviewFrom the reviews: From "Applied Rheology", Vol. 14/2, 2004, p. 81: " 'Condensed Matter Physics' is one of few books covering both hard and soft condensed matter on a graduate studies level. ... Strobl's book provides an excellent, well organized introduction to the fundamentals of condensed matter physics. Although the topic is approached from a physicist's point of view and ca. one half is devoted to crystals, the book will not only be of high value for physics students. Other scientists and engineers who need to learn about hard or soft condensed matter will find it very helpful as well." "This is a translation of the original German edition. It is a textbook covering the lectures given by the author at the University of Freiburg. … The presentation is very concise with due insistence on the interrelations between the various phenomena and concepts. As such it provides a good introduction to the physics of condensed matter which will be of value to a broad audience of scientists." (Marc Baus, Physicalia, Vol. 57 (3), 2005) "The underlying aim of the book is to cover the whole of condensed matter … in a form which is concise enough to be the basis of an undergraduate course. … As someone who has worked in solid state physics … I found the book quite stimulating. … an admirable book which fully succeeds in its basic aim and would be of interest to many already working in the field … . would integrate well into the course structure of many Physics Departments." (Dr. M. Blamire, Contemporary Physics, Vol. 46 (2), 2005)"Even though exciting new fields open up in bio- and polymer physics, few textbooks so far cover soft matter adequately. In this sense, Strobl follows a very modern approach for undergraduate teaching by trying a unified treatment of "condensed matter" properties. This is a tribute to the increasing importance of life sciences and modern materials sciences, which do no more focus on simple structures such as perfect crystals, but handle a continious spectrum of pure liquids, solutions, liquid crystals, amorphous rubbers and glasses, nanocrystals, and finally perfect solids.... As is intended by the author, the book distinguishes from similar volumes by putting emphasis on polymers and liquid crystals, and especially by combining elementary physics with modern and ambitious thematic...."Condensed Matter Physics" is a clearly structured and well-written textbook which may certainly be recommended for undergraduate students not only in experimental physics but also in materials and engineering sciences. … Like many other good textbooks, it benefits from the great experience of the lecturer in presentation and, last but not least, from valuable exercises at the end of the parts with corresponding solutions in the appendix." (Walter Langel, Journal of Solid State Electrochemistry, 2006)Table of Contents1 Structures.- 2 Moduli, Viscosities and Susceptibilities.- 3 Molecular Fields and Critical Phase Transitions.- 4 Charges and Currents.- 5 Microscopic Dynamics.- A Thermodynamic Potentials.- B Solutions to the Exercises.- C A Small Selection of Further Reading.- D Nomenclature.- References.
£49.49
Springer-Verlag Berlin and Heidelberg GmbH & Co. KG Nonlinear Control Systems
Book SynopsisThe purpose of this book is to present a self-contained description of the fun damentals of the theory of nonlinear control systems, with special emphasis on the differential geometric approach. The book is intended as a graduate text as weil as a reference to scientists and engineers involved in the analysis and design of feedback systems. The first version of this book was written in 1983, while I was teach ing at the Department of Systems Science and Mathematics at Washington University in St. Louis. This new edition integrates my subsequent teaching experience gained at the University of Illinois in Urbana-Champaign in 1987, at the Carl-Cranz Gesellschaft in Oberpfaffenhofen in 1987, at the University of California in Berkeley in 1988. In addition to a major rearrangement of the last two Chapters of the first version, this new edition incorporates two additional Chapters at a more elementary level and an exposition of some relevant research findings which have occurred since 1985.Trade ReviewFrom the reviews: Isidori's book is essential for anyone preparing for serious reading or basic research in the differential geometric approach to control theory and will not disappoint those mathematically trained. I have observed its use in the hands of two teachers other than the author; the students enjoyed it and made good use of it later. There is no universal solvent for nonlinear control problems, but the methods presented here are powerful. IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control 43 (1997) 1043-1044 (Reviewer: David L. Elliott) Table of Contents1. Local Decompositions of Control Systems.- 2. Global Decompositions of Control Systems.- 3. Input-Output Maps and Realization Theory.- 4. Elementary Theory of Nonlinear Feedback for Single-Input Single-Output Systems.- 5. Elementary Theory of Nonlinear Feedback for Multi-Input Multi-Output Systems.- 6. Geometric Theory of State Feedback: Tools.- 7. Geometric Theory of Nonlinear Systems: Applications.- 8. Tracking and Regulation.- 9. Global Feedback Design for Single-Input Single-Output Systems.- A. Appendix A.- A.1 Some Facts from Advanced Calculus.- A.2 Some Elementary Notions of Topology.- A.3 Smooth Manifolds.- A.4 Submanifolds.- A.5 Tangent Vectors.- A.6 Vector Fields.- B. Appendix B.- B.1 Center Manifold Theory.- B.2 Some Useful Properties.- B.3 Local Geometric Theory of Singular Perturbations.- Bibliographical Notes.- References.
£189.99
Springer-Verlag Berlin and Heidelberg GmbH & Co. KG Handbook of Contrast Echocardiography: Left ventricular function and myocardial perfusion
Book SynopsisAlthough the technology required for the successful application of contrast echo cardiography has evolved rapidly over the past few years, the technique has not yet gained widespread clinical acceptance. One important reason for the lack of clinical acceptance is the relative complexity of the technique, particularly in respect to myocardial perfusion imaging. The interaction between micro bubbles and ultrasound is an entire field by itsel£ as is the coronary microvasculature. It is in this regard that practicing echocardiographers, cardiologists in training, radiologists, so no graphers, and students will find 'A Handbook of Contrast Echocardiography' particularly useful. Written by two leaders in the field who have presented illustrative cases not only from their own laboratories but also from others around the world, this volume is a lucid, concise, and practical guide for the day-to-day use of contrast echocardiography. Dr Peter Burns has been involved in almost all the technical advances in the imaging methods that have made it possible to detect opacification of the left ventricular cavity and myocardium from a venous injection of microbubbles. He has been responsible to a large degree for advancing our understanding of the interaction between micro bubbles and ultrasound, which he describes in clear and easy to understand terms in this book. Dr Harald Becher has been active in the clincal application of contrast echocardiography for several years and has gained considerable experience with many imaging techniques and microbubbles, which he describes in this volume in some detail.Table of ContentsUnderstanding Ultrasound Contrast Agents for Echocardiography: Principles and Instrumentation. Introduction; The Need for Contrast Agents in Echocardiography; Contrast Agents for Ultrasound; Mode of Action; New Developments in Contrast Imaging; Conclusion; Assessment of LV Function by Contrast Echo Physiology and Pathophysiology of LV Function; Available Methods; Indications and Selection of Methods; How to Perfom Contrast Enhanced LV Studies; Assessment of Myocardial Perfusion by Contrast Echo; Coronary Flow and Flow Reserve; Tissue Perfusion
£85.49